Gre130 6F2T0176 PDF

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY
GRE130
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2014

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 2.0)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE130. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious
injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious
injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
DANGER
• Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is
dangerous.
• Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit immediately after switching off the power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
• Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
• Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
• Ratings
Before applying AC voltage or the power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the
equipment ratings.
• Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
• Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

• Power supply
If a power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records,
event records and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the
power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
• Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing of
this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If any
points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.
 2 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 6
2. Application Notes 8
2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 8
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection 8
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection 12
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 16
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 19
2.2 Frequency Protection 22
2.2.1 Frequency element 22
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element 22
2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output 27
3. Technical Description 29
3.1 Hardware Description 29
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 29
3.2 Input and Output Signals 31
3.2.1 AC Input Signals 31
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 31
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 35
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 36
3.3 Automatic Supervision 37
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 37
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 37
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 38
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 40
3.3.5 Failure Alarms 40
3.3.6 Trip Blocking 41
3.3.7 Setting 42
3.4 Recording Function 42
3.4.1 Fault Recording 42
3.4.2 Event Recording 43
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 43
3.5 Metering Function 45
3.6 Control Function 46
4. User Interface 47
4.1 Outline of User Interface 47
4.1.1 Front Panel 47
4.1.2 Communication Ports 49
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 50
 3 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 50

4.2.2 Relay Menu 52
4.2.3 Displaying Records 55
4.2.4 Status Display 61
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 65
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 67
4.2.7 Control 101
4.2.8 Testing 103
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 106
4.4 Modbus Interface 106
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 106
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication 106
4.7 Clock Function 107
4.8 Special Mode 108
5. Installation 109
5.1 Receipt of Relays 109
5.2 Relay Mounting 109
5.2.1 Flush Mounting 109
5.2.2 Dimensions 111
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 113
5.4 Handling Precautions 113
5.5 External Connections 114
5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE130 114
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 115
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 115
6.2 Cautions 115
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 115
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 116
6.3 Preparations 116
6.4 Hardware Tests 117
6.4.1 User Interfaces 117
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits 117
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits 118
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 119
6.5 Function Test 120
6.5.1 Measuring Element 120
6.5.2 Protection Scheme 125
6.5.3 Metering and Recording 126
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 126
6.6.1 On Load Test 126
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 126
6.7 Maintenance 128
6.7.1 Regular Testing 128
 4 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 128

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 129
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 129
6.7.5 Storage 129
7. Putting Relay into Service 130
Appendix A 131
Signal List 131
Appendix B 140
Event Record Items 140
Appendix C 146
Binary Output Default Setting List 146
Appendix D 148
Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 148
Appendix E 159
Case Outline 159
Appendix F 162
Typical External Connection 162
Appendix G 169
Relay Setting Sheet 169
Appendix H 179
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 179
Appendix I 183
Return Repair Form 183
Appendix J 188
Technical Data 188
Appendix K 194
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 194
Appendix L 197
Modbus: Interoperability 197
Appendix M 222
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 222
Appendix P 229
IEC61850: Interoperability 229
Appendix O 268
Ordering 268
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.2.0)
 5 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Introduction
GRE130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distribution substations,
generators, motors and transformers.
The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.

• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics
• Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection
The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.

• Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection
• Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection
The GRE130 series provides the following functions.

• Two settings groups
• Configurable binary inputs and outputs
• Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring
• Control hierarchy change
• Trip circuit supervision
• Automatic self-supervision
• Menu-based HMI system
• Configurable LED indication
• Metering and recording functions
• Front mounted USB port for PC communications
• Rear mounted RS485 serial port for communication
GRE130 provides continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits are
also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted USB port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 port. The
communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access data
gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication with
substation control and automation systems is supported according to the MODBUS RTU.
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE130 series and identifies the functions to be provided by
each member.
 6 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
GRE130 -
Model Number
410A, 411A, 412A
[APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PP 3PN 3PV
O/V IDMT       
O/V DT       
U/V IDMT       
U/V DT       
ZPS IDMT    * 
ZPS DT    * 
NPS IDMT     
NPS DT     
FRQ      
DFRQ      
Trip circuit supervision       
Self supervision       
CB state monitoring       
Trip counter alarm       
Multiple settings groups       
Metering       
Fault records       
Event records       
Disturbance records       
MODBUS RTU
      
communication
IEC60850-5-103
      
communication
IEC61850 communication
()* ()* ()* ()* ()* ()* ()*
(option)
[APPL]setting; 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage
1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage
2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage
2PZ: two phase-to-phase voltage with zero phase voltage input
3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage
3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage
3PV: three phase-to-neutral voltage with zero phase voltage input
Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time DT: definite time
O/V: overvoltage protection U/V: undervoltage protection
ZPS: zero phase sequence overvoltage NPS: negative phase sequence overvoltage
FRQ: Frequency protection DFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection
∗: V0 calculated from three phase voltages
()*: Optional communication for 412A model .
CAUTION: Do not change the APPL setting under service condition of the relay.
 7 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2. Application Notes
2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection
2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection
GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable

dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or
definite time (DT) operation. OV3 has definite time characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.
Pickup
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements
The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by
equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
  
  + c
TMS ×  
k
t (G ) =  
(1)
( )
a
 V − 1 
  Vs  
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = overvoltage setting (V),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure
2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [OV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.
Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves
Curve Description k a c
“IDMT” 1 1 0
“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000 0.00 – 5.00 0.000 – 5.000
by 0.001 step by 0.01 step by 0.001 step
 8 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Overvoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)

10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
1.000
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic
The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the inverse
time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional
delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the element returns
to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.5show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV3.
The OV1 protection allows the user to select either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic
as shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and
trip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection
is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.
The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
 9 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.
Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection
OV3. The OV3 gives alarm signals OV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3.
The OV1 to OV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV3EN].
63 TOV1
1(∗) & & t 0 102
OV1-A_TRIP
OV1 2(∗) 64 ≥1
3(∗) 65 & & t 0 103

OV1-B_TRIP
≥1
51 & & t 0 104
1(∗) OV1-C_TRIP
≥1
OV1 2(∗) 52 0.00 - 300.00s
INST
3(∗) 53
& 101
≥1 OV1_TRIP
[OV1EN] "DT"
≥1
+ &
"IDMT"
15
OV1_BLOCK 1 &
Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection
66 TOV2
1(∗) & & t 0 109
OV2-A_TRIP
OV2 2(∗) 67 ≥1
3(∗) 68 & & t 0 110

OV2-B_TRIP
≥1
57 & & t 0 111
1(∗) OV2-C_TRIP
58
≥1
OV2 2(∗) 0.00 - 300.00s
INST
59
3(∗)
& 108
≥1 OV2_TRIP
[OV2EN] "DT"
≥1
+ &
"IDMT"
16
OV2_BLOCK 1 &
69 TOV3
1(∗) & & t 0 116
OV3-A_ALARM
OV3 2(∗) 70
3(∗) 71 & & t 0 117

OV3-B_ ALARM
[OV3EN]
& & t 0 118
+ OV3-C_ ALARM
17
0.00 - 300.00s 115
OV3_BLOCK 1 ≥1 OV3_ ALARM
(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
 10 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[APPL] setting
Phase
1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP
1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase
2 －－ B - C phase B phase B - C phase
3 －－－ C phase C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting
TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.
TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.
TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.
OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting
TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.
TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.
TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.
OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1% 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.
OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.
TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.
OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1% 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.
[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable
[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable
[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable
 11 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection
GRE130 provides three independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are
programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 has definite time
characteristic only.
Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.
0 V
Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements
The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2)
following the form described in IEC 60255-127:
  
  + c
TMS ×  
k
t (G ) = a   (2)
 1 − V
 ( )
Vs  
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),
V = energising voltage (V),
Vs = undervoltage setting (V),
2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [UV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
The UV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the inverse
time delay is used.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional
delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the element returns
to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without
causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage
rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of
the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
 12 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Undervoltage Inverse Time

Curves
1000.000
100.000
TMS = 10
10.000
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.11 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV3.
The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal
UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is
enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.
The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.
Figure 2.1.11 shows the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3. The UV3
gives alarm signal UV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3.
The UV1 to UV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV3EN].
In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages
drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV3 are prevented from operating. This function can be
blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used) when
the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load shedding.
Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.
 13 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
72 TUV1
1(∗) & & t 0 123
UV1-A_TRIP
UV1 2(∗) 73 ≥1
74 & & t 0 124
UV1-B_TRIP
3(∗)
≥1
157
1(∗) & & t 0 125
UV1-C_TRIP
UV1 2(∗) 158 ≥1
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
3(∗) 159
UVBLK 122
97
≥1 UV1_TRIP
&
VBLK 1 NON
& UVBLK
&
[VBLKEN]
+ &
"ON"
[UVTST]
"OFF" "DT"
[UV1EN]
≥1
+
"IDMT"
18
UV1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection
75 TUV2
1(∗) & & t 0 127
UV2-A_TRIP
UV2 2(∗) 76 ≥1
77 & & t 0 128
UV2-B_TRIP
3(∗)
≥1
177
1(∗) & & t 0 129
UV2-C_TRIP
UV2 2(∗) 178 NON ≥1
INST UVBLK 0.00 - 300.00s
179
3(∗) "DT"
[UV2EN]
≥1 ≥1
126
UV2_TRIP
+ &
"IDMT"
19 &
UV2_BLOCK 1
&
78 TUV3
1(∗) & & t 0 131
79 UV3-A_ALARM
UV3 2(∗)
80 & t 0 132
3(∗) & UV3-B_ALARM
[UV3EN]
+ & & t 0 133
UV3-C_ALARM
"ON"
NON BLK 0.00 - 300.00s
130
20 ≥1 UV3_ALARM
UV3_BLOCK 1
(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:
 14 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[APPL] setting
Phase
1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP
1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase
2 －－ B - C phase B phase B - C phase
3 －－－ C phase C - A phase
Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting
ranges.
UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting
TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.
TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.
TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting
TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.
TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.
TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.
UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.
TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.
VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.
[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ DT UV1 Enable
C
[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable
[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ DT UV2 Enable
C
[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable
 15 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZPS) is applied to earth fault detection on
unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.
The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZPS element susceptible to any 3rd
harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic
filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.
For earth fault detection, the following two methods are in general use.
• Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-delta
connection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.
• Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2.114.
A B C
GRE130
V0
Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System
A B
GRE130
V0
Resistor
Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator
Two independent elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 are provided. These elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC
60255-127:
 16 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
  
  
 k  + c 
t (G ) = TMS ×  (3)
 V0  − 1  
α
  V S   
 
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),
V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),
2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [ZPS∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
ZPS Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
10.000
1.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0.100
TMS = 1
0.010
0 5 10 15 20
Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZPS
 17 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is
identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection.
Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 with independent thresholds output
trip signals ZPS1 TRIP and ZPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1 and TZPS2.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN].
93 TZPS1
ZPS1 t 0
& & 134
ZPS1 197 ≥1 ZPS1 TRIP
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[ZPS1EN] ≥1
+ &
"IDMT"
21
ZPS1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.16 ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection
94 TZPS2
ZPS2 t 0
& & 135
ZPS2 198 ≥1 ZPS2_ALARM
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[ZPS2EN] ≥1
+ &
"IDMT"
22
ZPS2_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.17 ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection
and their setting ranges.
ZPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZPS1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping.
TZPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if
[ZPS1EN]=IDMT.
TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS1 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=DT.
TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS1 definite time delayed reset.
ZPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZPS2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming.
TZPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[ZPS2EN]=IDMT.
TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS2 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=DT.
TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS2 definite time delayed reset.
[ZPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZPS1 Enable
[ZPS2EN] Off / On Off ZPS2 Enable
 18 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection
The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection (NPS) is used to detect voltage unbalance
conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.
The NPS protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be caused
by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can lead to
increases in the negative sequence voltage.
The NPS protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if the
phase sequence is reversed.
Two independent elements NPS1 and NPS2 are provided. The elements are programmable for
definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.
The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC
60255-127.
  
  
 k  + c 
t (G ) = TMS ×  (4)
 V 2  − 1  
 α
  V S   
 
where:
t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),
V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),
Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),
2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN]. If
required, set the scheme switch [NPS∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These
 19 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
NPS Overvoltage
Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000

10.000
1.000 TMS = 10
TMS = 5
TMS = 2
0.100
TMS = 1
0.010
0 5 10 15 20
Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NPS
Definite time reset

A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NPS1 element when the inverse time delay is
used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.
Scheme Logic
Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection.
Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output
trip signals NPS1 TRIP and NPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.
The tripping can be disabled using scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN].
95 TNPS1
NPS1 t 0
& & 136
NPS1 199 ≥1 NPS1 TRIP
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[NPS1EN] ≥1
+ &
"IDMT"
23
NPS1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.19 NPS1 Overvoltage Protection
 20 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
96 TNPS2
NPS2 t 0
& & 137
NPS2 200 ≥1 NPS2_ALARM
INST 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
[NPS2EN] ≥1
+ &
"IDMT"
24
NPS2_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.20 NPS2 Overvoltage Protection
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage
protection and their setting ranges.
The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements
NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is approximately 200ms.
NPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.
TNPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=IDMT.
TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS1 definite time setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=DT.
TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS1 definite time delayed reset.
NPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.
TNPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=IDMT.
TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS2 definite time setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=DT.
TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS2 definite time delayed reset.
[NPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NPS1 Enable
[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable
 21 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.2 Frequency Protection

For a four-stage frequency protection, GRE130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring
elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency,
overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.
Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation capability
and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load shedding.
Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage
due to overfrequency conditions.
Frequency rate-of-change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly
when the frequency change is very rapid.
A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.
2.2.1 Frequency element
Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting value.
Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting value.
These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5 ms.
They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive times.
The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element
(FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.
Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristics of the UF and OF elements.
Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements
2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element
The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). GRE130
provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate
element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt=100ms),
as shown Figure 2.2.2 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change
exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.
The output of both the D and R elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK)
operation during undervoltage condition.
 22 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 2.2.2 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.2.3 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection for stage 1. The first frequency
element F11, the second F12, the frequency rise rate-of-change element DFR1 and frequency decay
rate-of-change element DFD1 can all output a trip command independently under the condition that
the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FVBLK.
211 231 235

F11
&
F1 E F RQ1 TRIP
& t 0
0.00 – 100.00S
212 232
F12 & t 0
F2
&
O ≥1 0.00 – 100.00S
U
B
OO
≥1 Scheme Logic
UU Selection : [Logic1]
[FT1] OFF
+
213
DF-R1 233
& & DFR
214
DF-D1 234
& & DFD
R
≥1
D
FVBLK BOTH ≥1
[DFT1] OFF
+
42
FRQ1 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic
To apply the various types of frequency protection, the GRE130 has the following three scheme
switches for each stage. For stage 1,
[FT1]: This switch selects the frequency protection to apply as well as provide the
measuring elements F11 and F12 with an overfrequency or underfrequency
characteristic.
 23 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[FT1] F11 / F12 characteristic Protection selected

setting F11 F12
O OF(*) - Overfrequency protection only with F11 element
U UF(**) - Underfrequency protection only with F11 element
B OF UF Overfrequency protection with F11 element and
underfrequency protection with F12 element
OO OF OF Overfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements
UU UF UF Underfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements
Off OF OF To block frequency protection
(*) OF: Overfrequency characteristic
(**)UF: Underfrequency characteristic
[DFT1]: This switch selects which frequency rate-of-change protection to apply. The
following protections can be selected by the [DFT1] settings.
[DFT1] setting Protection selected

R Frequency rise rate-of-change protection only
D Frequency decay rate-of-change protection only
BOTH Both of frequency rise rate-of-change and decay rate-of-change
protections
Off To block frequency rate-of-change protection
[LOGIC1]: This switch is provided in the scheme logic selection circuit in Table 2.2.1 and
determines the trip command combination of frequency element output and
frequency rate-of-change element output. The following table shows the [Logic1]
setting and corresponding combinations.
Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic

[Logic1] Scheme Logic Trip Command Logic ( +:OR, x : AND )
Setting
F1
E
F2 E = F1 + F2 + DFR + DFD
≥1
L1 DFR
DFD
F1 & ≥1 E E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2

F2
L2
DFR
≥1
DFD
F1 ≥1
&
E E = F1 + F2 x (DFR + DFD)
F2
L3 DFR
≥1
DFD
F1 & ≥1 E E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)

F2 &
L4
DFR
≥1
DFD
 24 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
F1 & ≥1 E E = F1 x DFR + F2 x DFD

F2 &
L5
DFR
DFD
The individual scheme logic for stages 2 to 4 are similar to that of stage 1 except that the device
names of the measuring elements, timers, scheme switches and binary input signals change and the
logic described above is applied to stages 2 to 4.
215 236 240

F21
&
F1 E F RQ2 TRIP
& t 0
0.00 – 100.00S
216 237
F22 & t 0
F2
&
O ≥1 0.00 – 100.00S
U
B
OO
≥1 Scheme Logic
[FT2] OFF
+
217
DF-R2 238
& & DFR
218
DF-D2 239
& & DFD
R
≥1
D
FVBLK BOTH ≥1
[DFT2] OFF
+
43
FRQ2 BLOCK 1
219 241 245

F31
&
F1 E F RQ3 TRIP
& t 0
0.00 – 100.00S
220 242
F32 & t 0
F2
&
O ≥1 0.00 – 100.00S
U
B
OO
≥1 Scheme Logic
[FT3] OFF
+
221
DF-R3 243
& & DFR
222
DF-D3 244
& & DFD
R
≥1
D
FVBLK BOTH ≥1
[DFT3] OFF
+
44
FRQ3 BLOCK 1
 25 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
223 246 250

F41
&
F1 E F RQ4 TRIP
& t 0
0.00 – 100.00S
224 247
F42 & t 0
F2
&
O ≥1 0.00 – 100.00S
U
B
OO
≥1 Scheme Logic
[FT4] OFF
+
225
DF-R4 248
& & DFR
226
DF-D4 249
& & DFD
R
≥1
D
FVBLK BOTH ≥1
[DFT4] OFF
+
45
FRQ4 BLOCK 1
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the
table below.
F1 (*) 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 51.00 Hz First frequency element setting
( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 61.00 Hz )
F2 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 49.00 Hz Second frequency element setting
( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 59.00 Hz )
DF (**) 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s Frequency rate-of-change (**)
FVBLK(***) 40 –100 V 1V 40 V Undervoltage block
TF1 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of first frequency element
TF2 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of second frequency element
FT Off / O / U / B / OO / UU B Frequency protection selection
DFT Off / R / D / Both Both Frequency rate-of-change protection selection
Logic L1 / L2 / L3 / L4 / L5 L1 Scheme logic selection
(*): Number 1 to 4 enter into  for stages 1 to 4 respectively.
(**): DF is a common setting element name for DFR and DFD.
(***): FVBLK is common to stage 1 to 4.
 26 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRE130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip
and alarm for each protection. Figure 2.4.1 shows the trip and alarm signals grouped for each
protection.
GRE130 provides 4 or 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.3.
After the trip signal has disappeared, following the clearance of the fault, the reset time of the
tripping output relay can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or via a binary
input. This resetting resets all of the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by
monitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
OV1 TRIP
OV2 TRIP
UV1 TRIP 141
GEN_TRIP
UV2 TRIP ≥1
ZPS1 TRIP
NPS1 TRIP
FRQ1 TRIP
FRQ2 TRIP
FRQ3 TRIP
FRQ4 TRIP
OV1-A TRIP
OV2-A TRIP 372
≥1 GEN_TRIP-A
UV1-A TRIP
UV2-A TRIP
OV1-B TRIP
OV2-B TRIP 373
≥1 GEN_TRIP-B
UV1-B TRIP
UV2-B TRIP
OV1-C TRIP
OV2-C TRIP 374
≥1 GEN_TRIP-C
UV1-C TRIP
UV2-C TRIP
375
ZPS1_TRIP GEN. TRIP-N
Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs
 27 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
OV3 ALARM
380
UV3 ALARM ≥1 GEN_ALARM
ZPS2 ALARM
NPS2 ALARM
OV3-A ALARM ≥1 381

GEN_ALARM-A
UV3-A ALARM
OV3-B ALARM
≥1 382
GEN_ALARM-B
UV3-B ALARM
OV3-C ALARM
≥1 383
GEN_ALARM-C
UV3-C ALARM
384
ZPS2 ALARM GEN_ALARM-N
Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont’d)
Pick-up signals
GRE130 provides various pick-up signal outputs to select the signal No. for pick-up. The pick-up
signal of IDMT elements are output from ***-INST shown as each scheme logic. When the DT
elements operate, the ***-INST element is NOT output.
 28 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRE130 is shown in Appendix E.

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display
(LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording,
status and setting data.
There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Yellow Lit when relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED Red/Green/ Lit when CB is closed.
Yellow
CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.
LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled
REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1) Red/Green/ User-configurable
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for
OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latched operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can be
changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can be viewed
on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the operation, see
Section 4.2.1.
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user,
 29 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by the output of an alarm element
such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..
The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can
be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .
The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit, the
CB can be controlled using the ○ and ｜ keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LED is lit,
the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. When neither of
these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.
The ▼ key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) view on the LCD. The ▼ key will
scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when the
LCD is in the Digest screen mode.
The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.
The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in
the “MAIN MENU”.
The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to input
settings or to change settings.
The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local
personal computer.
Liquid crystal
display
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Control keys
Motor status
Operation keys
To a local PC
USB type B connector

Figure 3.1.1 Front Panel (model 410, 411)
 30 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE130 model and their respective input
terminal numbers. Their terminal numbers depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Term. No. Model

TB1 at
410/411 410, 411, 412
TB2 at 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PN 3PV 3PP

412
Phase-to- Phase-to- A-B phase A-B phase A phase A phase A-B phase
1-2 phase neutral
voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage
B-C phase B-C phase B phase B phase B-C phase

3-4 --- --- voltage voltage voltage voltage voltage
--- --- --- --- C phase C phase C-A phase

5-6 voltage voltage voltage
7-8 Ve Ve --- Ve --- Ve Ve
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
The GRE130 provides 2 (Model 410) or 6 (Model 411 / 412) programmable binary input circuits.
Each binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion,
detection threshold voltage change and function selection.
Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change
The binary input circuit of the GRE130 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up
and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure 3.2.1.
Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted
operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts.
Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm”
(normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can
be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.
The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range varies
depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated model is
ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and BI2, and
to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection nominal voltage
can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.
The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at 77V
and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In the case of 24V and 48V supplies,
the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured for
operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to “Enable”.
For the case where TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3), then the
binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply
 31 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS – BI6SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BITHR1 * BI1-2 nominal voltage 48 / 110 / 220 110
(12 / 24 / 48 ) (24)
(24 / 48 / 110 ) (48)
BITHR2 * BI3-6 nominal voltage 110 / 220 110
(24 / 48) (24)
(48 / 110) (110)
TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off
BI1PUD – BI6PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD – BI6DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
*At the PC interface software RSM100 (Relay Setting and Monitoring system), BI threshold voltage
settings are indicated by V1, V2 and V3. The V1, V2 and V3 are distinguished with 11th digit of
ordering code for supply voltage, as shown below,:
Supply voltage (11th digt of ordering cord) V1 V2 V3
110 - 220V (-1x-xx) BITH1 48V 110V 220
BITH2 110V 220V -
48 - 110V (-2x-xx) BITH1 24V 48V 110V
BITH2 48V 110V -
12 - 48V (-Ax-xx) BITH1 12V 24V 48V
BITH2 24V 48V -
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI2 or BI6 by
setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the
LCD.
The binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc
supply voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
 32 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
GRE130
(+) (−) BI1PUD BI1DOD [BI1SNS]
BI1 t 0 0 t
BI1 command
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2PUD BI2DOD [BI2SNS]
BI2 t 0 0 t
BI2 command
BI2
"Norm"
[BITHR1]
1
+
"220V" "Inv"
BI3 +
"110V"
+
"48V"
BI6PUD BI6DOD [BI6SNS]
BI6 t 0 0 t
BI6 BI6 command
"Norm"
[BITHR2] 1
+ "Inv"
"220V"
+
"110V"
0V
Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table
3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the
setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and
the LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
[OV1BLK]
BI1 COMMAND OV1 BLOCK
"ON"
[OV2BLK]
OV2 BLOCK
"ON"
[OV3BLK]
OV3 BLOCK
"ON"
[Alarm4]
Alarm 4
"ON"
Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic
The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as
shown in Figure 3.2.2.
 33 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals
Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Condition

Overvoltage protection1 block OV1 BLOCK / OV 1BLK Closed to block
Undervoltage protection1 block UV1 BLOCK / UV 1BLK Closed to block
Undervoltage protection2 block UV 2 BLOCK / UV 2BLK Closed to block
Undervoltage protection3 block UV 3 BLOCK / UV 3BLK Closed to block
Zero phase sequence OV1 block ZPS1 BLOCK / ZP1BLK Closed to block
Zero phase sequence OV2 block ZPS2 BLOCK / ZP2BLK Closed to block
Negative phase sequenceOV1 block NPS1 BLOCK / NP1BLK Closed to block
Negative phase sequenceOV2 block NPS2 BLOCK / NP2BLK Closed to block
Frequency protection1 block FRQ1 BLOCK / FRQ1BLK Closed to block
Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply
State transition for cold load protection, trip CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact closed.
supervision and CB monitoring
CB monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally closed contactclosed.
Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication
and latch of binary output relays
Synchronize clock SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK Synchronize clock
Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record
Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.
Remote Open Remote OPEN / RMTOPN CB normally open contact.
Remote Close Remote CLOSE / RMTCLS CB normally close contact.
Control Lock Control Lock / CNTLCK Closed to block
(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SGS – BI6SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 OFF
Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message using up to 22 characters for
each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then when
inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
 34 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals

The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRE130 provides 5 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for the relay
fail output and four programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO4.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The setting
is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix A can be assigned to output relays BO1 to BO4
individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN /
CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control
switch ○ is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.
Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in
Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix G shows
the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the
scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set
by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does not
continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues, the BO output is continuous for the time
duration of the input signal.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the power supply circuit is
detected.
Signal List
& Auxiliary relay

4 GATES
Appendix A
or ≥1
≥1
4 GATES
&
TBO
0 t
&
[RESET] "Dw" 0.00 – 10.00s
+ "Dl" S
&
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+
≥
BI1_COMMAND RMTRST
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
 35 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
[RESET] Ins Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix A Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix A
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

GRE130 is provided with a PLC function which enables user-configurable sequence logic based
upon binary signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc.
can be produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation of fault and disturbance records can be programmed
using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for using a
user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For details of the PLC tool, refer
to the PLC tool instruction manual. (see 6F2S0810 Instruction manual – PLC TOOL)
Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool
 36 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Although the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it continuously
monitors the power system in order to detect a fault which may occur at any time, and must operate
for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of
the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. The GRE130 implements an
automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:
• The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
• When a failure occurs, it is recorded as an Alarm record, the user should be easily able to
identify the location of the failure.
• Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of
the AC input circuit is verified.
• Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]= “3PN” setting
|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 ≤ 6.35 (V)
• Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]≠ “1PN” or “1PP” setting
|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 ≤ 6.35 (V) where, a = Phase shift operator of 120°, a2 = Phase shift
operator of 240°
The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection of
failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.
The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the voltage
input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected with the
incorrect phase sequence.
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is applied to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed
range, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to verify
that memory circuits are healthy:
• Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
• Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
 37 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the relay software is provided, to check that the
relay software is running normally.
Power supply Monitoring

The secondary voltage level is monitored, and a check is made to ensure that the DC voltage is
within a prescribed range.
Issuing of Alarms
The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each
monitoring item are as follows;
• A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring: less
than 1s
• AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, as
described below.
Trip Circuit Supervision using 1 binary input
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using a binary input. Figure 3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact , a small current flows through the binary
input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker
open and closed conditions. Then the logic signal output of the binary input circuit TC FAIL is "1"
under healthy conditions.
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit, then the binary input resets and TC
FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output
when the TC FAIL output is "0". If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and
“Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.
Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and one BI is
selected for "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB is
closed.
GRE130 Circuit Breaker
Trip Output CB Trip Coil -ve Trip

+ve
Trip Supply
Supply
Binary CB Aux.
Input Contacts
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input
 38 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
t 0 0 t
TC FAIL TCSV
≥1 1 &
(BI command)
0.4s 0.4s
TC FAIL
(BI command)
CB status “closed”
& ≥1
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic
Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact a small current flows in the photo-couplers,
the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open
and breaker closed conditions.
If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip
Circuit Fail alarm.
Monitoring is enabled by setting scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two BIs
selected for " TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB is
closed. TCS using 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. For TCS using 2BIs
the BI nominal operating voltage ([BITHR1]) should be set to a value of approximately half that of
the trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] can be set at "48" (or
"12").
GRE130 Circuit Breaker
Trip Output CB Aux. CB Trip Coil -ve Trip

+ve
Contacts Supply
Trip
Supply
Resistor
Binary Input Binary Input

(BI1) (BI2)
Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs
The resistors connected in series with the binary inputs are to prevent unnecessary tripping of the
circuit breaker if any one component suffers a short-circuit condition. The value of resistance should
be chosen to limit the current flowing through the circuit breaker trip coil to 60mA in the event of a
short circuit of BI1 with the circuit breaker closed. A typical value for a 110V dc rated circuit is
3.3kΩ.
 39 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of the circuit breaker (CB). If
two binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then
the CB state monitoring function becomes active. Under normal circumstances these inputs are in
opposite states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state for a period of five
seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in an LCD
message and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and BIn
respectively, and the functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”
respectively. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
t 0 1271
CB CONT_OPN =1 1 CBSV
&
5.0s
CB CONT_CLS
[CBSMEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of a CB is required in order to check the trip circuit, the operating mechanism
and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of
fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of a CB:
• The number of trip operations are counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operating
mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm
is issued and informs the user of the time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined
setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
• Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks the CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is advised if the CB operation is slow.
The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase
currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a
user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified interrupting
time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch
[OPTAEN].
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3.5 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
 40 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼ key. The event record messages are shown on
the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting
is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and event
recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCD LED LED LED Alarm record Message

Message "IN SERVICE" "ALARM" "Relay fail"
AC input imbalance Err:V0, V0 err, V2 err,
On/Off (2) On (4)
monitoring Err:V2 (1) Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
A/D accuracy check
(1) Off On (4) Relay fail
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
Power supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A
CB condition monitoring ALM: TP On On Off TP COUNT ALM,
Trip count alarm COUNT Relay fail-A
Operating time alarm ALM: OP time On On Off OP time ALM, Relay fail-A
(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.5). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is
shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.
3.3.6 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
• A/D accuracy check
• Memory monitoring
• Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output(ALM&BLK), or
if only an alarm is output (ALM).
 41 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.3.7 Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.

[SVCNT] ALM&BLK/ALM Off Automatic supervision and AC
input imbalance supervision
[TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision
[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm
TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting
The scheme switch [SVCNT] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are set
in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.
3.4 Recording Function

The GRE130 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is initiated by a tripping command from the GRE130 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Power system quantities
Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Faulted phase
This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.
 42 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Power system quantities

The following power system quantities are recorded both pre-fault and post-fault.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of
the system residual voltage (Ve)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)
- Frequency (f)
3.4.2 Event Recording
The events shown in Appendix B are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status
changes. For BI1 to BI6 commands, the user can select the items to be recorded and their status
change mode to initiate recording as below.
One of the following four modes is selectable.
Modes Setting
Not to record the event. N
To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O
To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R
To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B
For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"
Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is overwritten. The LCD display only shows 100 records. All event records
(200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to download all of the event records onto a PC refer
to the RSM100 instruction manual.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is initiated when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operates or
a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is initiated when a start command is
initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers.
The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals
and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B can be
assigned using the binary signal setting of a disturbance record.
Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording
Model Model 410 , 411, 412

APPL setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP
Vph Vph Vab Vab Va Va Vab
Vbc Vbc Vb Vb Vbc
Analog signals
Vc Vc Vca
Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve
 43 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can be
set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the combined duration for the pre-fault and post-fault recording times
is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The
approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is
shown in Table 3.4.2. (Recording time = pre-fault recording time + post-fault recording time)
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time 0.2s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 3.0s 4.0s 5.0s

50Hz 40 29 19 14 9 7 5
60Hz 40 24 16 12 8 6 5
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Time1 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 0.3 s Pre--fault recording time
Time2 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Post--fault recording time
OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection
UV 5.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection
ZPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection
NPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection
Starting disturbance recording using a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation
[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation
[ZPS] OFF/ON ON Start by ZPS operation
[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation
 44 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.5 Metering Function

The GRE130 relay measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages,
residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages and frequency. The measurement data shown
below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.
The following quantities are measured and updated every second.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)
- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)
- Frequency (f)
- Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)
- Frequency rate-of-change (df / dt)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side as
determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the VT ratio as well. For
the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7. In
the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged
over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values are
shown on the display screen.
The displayed quantities depend on [APPL] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1. Input
voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for measurement.
Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle,
where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity
Model Model 410

APPL 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP
Van 
Vbn 
Vcn 
Vph  
Vab     
Vbc     
Vcb   
V1     
V2     
V0   
ｆ       
f max       
f min       
df / dt       
 45 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3.6 Control Function

The relay is provided with the following control functions:
• CB control
• Interlocking
• Change of CB control hierarchy
The CB control function operates the CB by using the open command key ○ or close command
key ｜ on the front panel of the relay, a BI command from remote state or by using the
communication function.
The interlock function blocks the CB close command using the control lock signal of the BI
command.The change of CB control hierarchy changes the CB control state to Local or Remote. The
Local mode is controled at the front panel of the relay (see chapter 4.2.7). The Remote mode is
controlled by BI command or by a communication function of Modbus (see Appendix M) or IEC
61850 (see Appendix P).
 46 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) via
a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using MODBUS communication
via an RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree for
the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.
(a) Model 410, 411 (b) Model 412

Figure 4.1.1 Front Panel of GRE130 (without cover)
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing ▼ key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the main-
menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top of
the main-menu. If any display is left for approximately 5 minutes without operation, the back-light
will go off.
LED
There are 14 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
 47 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.
CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.
Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled
Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1) R/G/Y user-configurable
LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED illuminates when the relay operates and remains lit even after the trip command
releases . The TRIP LED can be extinguished by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is maintained.
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to input
or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
 ▼, ▲,
▲
▼
, : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical

values and text strings.
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
RESET key
Pressing the RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.
Control keys
The control keys are used for CB control. When the LCD display cursor is not at the CB control
position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control keys will not function.
 ○ : Used for CB open operation. When the CB is in the open position, the ○ key does
not function.
 48 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
② ｜ : Used for CB close operation. When the CB is in the closed position, the ｜
key does not function
③ L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when the control function is enabled.
USB connector
The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:

• USB port
• RS485 port
• Optional Communication Unit port
USB port
This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front
panel. By connecting a personal computer (PC) to this connector, setting operation and display
functions can be performed.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to construct a
network communication system.
The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.2.
TB2
TB1
RS485 Port
Figure 4.1.2 Location of RS485 Port
 49 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Optional Fibre or Ethernet LAN port for model 412A

An optional Ethernet LAN port can be connected to substation automation system via an Ethernet
communication networks using the IEC 61850 protocol. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) for
Ethernet LAN is provided at the rear of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.3.
TB3 TB2 TB1
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
5 6
5 6 7 8
7 8 9 10
9 10 11 12
11 12
13 14
　ｆor Optional
Communication Port
Figure 4.1.3 Location of Optional Communication Port
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore, LCD
screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays

Displays during normal operation
When the GRE130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the ▼ key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are the "Indication",
"Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The
following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
 50 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Metering
V a n * * . * * V
V b n * * . * * V
V c n * * . * * V
V 0 * * . * * V
V 1 * * . * * V
V 2 * * . * * V
f * * . * * H z
f / t * * . * * H z / s
To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault) of the latest fault indication,
press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases.
O V 1 : Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is lit
as well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping.
Press the ▼ to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.
Press the RESET key for more than 3s to reset the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs
(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to a latched signal if triggered by tripping.
To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
 51 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.
• Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Displays in automatic supervision operation

Auto-supervision
E r r : R O M , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure when the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision"
screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED
lights.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM" LED
remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed and
the "ALARM" LED lights.
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest
"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * : A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to ALM4.
4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy for the GRE130. The menu has some sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see Appendix
D.
 52 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Menu Record Fault

Event
Disturbance
Counter
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view) Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set. (change) Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Control Password(Ctrl)
Local / Remote
CB close/open
Test Password(test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count can be accessed.
 53 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts clock and
LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate for
RSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs
and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings for password, description, relay address and
baud rate for Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary
outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Control
The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote position,
the CB control hierarchy change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the CB
close/open position, the CB control keys ○ and ｜ are enabled.
Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set test switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then
proceed to the relay menus.
M A I N M E N U
＞ R e c o r d
S t a t u s
S e t . ( v i e w )
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
C o n t r o l
T e s t
To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the ▼ key to turn
off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The
8th line under some items is not displayed for all of the screens. " ",or " " or " " displayed on the
far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the ▼ and ▲ keys.
 54 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p _
> T r i p 1
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O V 1
O f f / O n
U V 1
O f f / O n
Z P S 1
O f F / O n
N P S 1
O f f / O n
F R Q 1
O f f / O n
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
D press the END or CANCEL key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records

The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records
To display fault records, do the following:

• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/ 1 R e c o r d
＞ F a u l t
E v e n t
D i s t u r b a n c e
C o u n t e r
• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
 55 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 2 F a u l t
＞ V i e w r e c o r d
C l e a r
• Select "View record" to display the dates and times of the fault records stored in the relay from
the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F a u l t
＞ ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 1 0
♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the ▲ and ▼ keys and press the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s
V a n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V b n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V a b * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V b c * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c a * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V p h * * . * * k V
V 0 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 1 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 2 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
f * * . * * H z
f / t * * . * * H z / s
 56 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to
the relay
To clear all the fault records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d s
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records
To display event records, do the following:


• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/ 2 E v e n t
C l e a r
• Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E v e n t
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 1 0 0
O V 1 ･ A t r i P O n
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 0 9 9
O V 1 ･ A t r i p O N
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 9 8
O V 1 ･ A t r i p O n
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 2
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 1
 57 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
▼
The time is displayed by pressing the key.
/ 3 E v e n t
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0
O V 1 ･ A t r i p O N
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0
▲
Press the key to return the screen with date.
To clear all the event records, do the following:

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records
Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only the
recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the following
sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.

• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
 58 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e
C l e a r
• Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2 C o u n t e r
＞ V i e w c o u n t e r
C l e a r T r i p s
C l e a r T r i p s A (*)
C l e a r T r i p s B (*)
C l e a r T r i p s C (*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
 59 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
• Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s * * * * * *
T r i p s A * * * * * * (*)
T r i p s B * * * * * * (*)
T r i p s C * * * * * * (*)
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
To clear each count, do the following:

• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s ?
• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s A ?
• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s B ?
• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s C ?
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
 60 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.4 Status Display
From the sub-menu "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data is updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data
To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
＞ M e t e r i n g
B i n a r y I / O
R e l a y e l e m e n t
T i m e s y n c .
C l o c k a d j u s t .
L C D c o n t r a s t
• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 4 M e t e r i n g
V a n * * . * * k V APPL = 3PP
* * * . * °
V b n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c n * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V a b * * . * * k V APPL = 3PN
* * * . * °
V b c * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V c a * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V p h * * . * * k V APPL = 1PP
 61 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
V 0 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 1 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
V 2 * * . * * k V
* * * . * °
f * * . * * H z
f m a x * * . * * H z
f m i n * * . * * H z
f / t * * . * * H z / s
f / t x * * . * * H z / s
f / t n * * . * * H z / s
Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase
angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed.
Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to
the relay
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
To display the binary input and output status, do the following:

• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
The display format is shown below.

[      ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 FAIL
Output (OP2) BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 410.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable.
The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output
relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.
Line 3 shows the binary output status for model 412. BO5-8 (OP2) are available only at model 412
 62 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements
To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:

• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
A N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
A B O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B C O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C A O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
A N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
A B U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
B C U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
C A U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]
V Z P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]
V N P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]
F R Q 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[    ]
AN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A phase OV elements
BN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B phase OV element
CN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C phase OV element
AB OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A to B phase OV elements
BC OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B to C phase OV element
CA OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C to A phase OV element
OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 OV elements
AN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A phase UV element
BN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B phase UV element
CN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C phase UV element
AB UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A to B phase UV element
BC UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B to C phase UV element
CA UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C to A phase UV element
ZPS1-2 ZPS1 ZPS2 Zero Phase Sequence element
NPS1-2 NPS1 NPS2 - - Negative Phase Sequence element
FRQ1-4 FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 Frequency element
 63 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element is
in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source
The internal clock of the GRE130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input
signal clock, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP(IEC61850). To display on the LCD whether
these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with,
do the following:
• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
* B I : A C T .
M o d b u s : I n a c t .
I E C I n a c t
S N T P I n a c t
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment
To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ]
> M i n u t e
0 _
H o u r
0 _
D a y
2 6 _
M o n t h
8 _
Y e a r
2 0 1 0 _
 64 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When[BI], [M] or [S] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details on how to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing the
CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast
To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t
■ ■ ■ ■
• Press the
▲
or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by
▲
pressing the key and thicker by pressing the key.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication or optional communication.
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
 65 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5.1 Relay Version
To view the relay version, do the following.

• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
> V e r s i o n
D e s c r i p t i o n
C o m m s
R e c o r d
S t a t u s
P r o t e c t i o n
B i n a r y I / P
B i n a r y O / P
L E D
C o n t r o l
• Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.
/ 2 V e r s i o n
> R e l a y t y p e
S o f t w a r e .
• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE130-411A-10-10)
G R E 1 3 0 - 4 1 1 A - 1 0
- 1 0
•Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
(ex.;GS1EM1-03-A)
■ S o f t w a r e
G S 1 E M 1 - 0 3 - *
■ P L C d a t a
P G R E 1 3 0 A * * *
( * * * * * * * * )
 66 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description","Comms","Record", "Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P" ,"LED" ,

"Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and IP address
Baud rate in IEC60870-103 or Modbus
IEC 61850 setting
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between the
settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending on
the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings changes
be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item

When the screen shown below is displayed, setting of the relay can be performed as follows.
 67 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼
keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
> P a s s w o r d
C o m m s
R e c o r d
S t a t u s
P r o t e c t i o n
B i n a r y I / P
B i n a r y O / P
L E D
C o n t r o l
F r e q u e n c y
• Move the cursor to a setting item.

• Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
> P l a n t n a m e
To select a character, use keys ▼ , ▲ ,

▲
and to move the blinking cursor down, up, left and

right. "→" and "←" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22
characters can be entered.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `  
• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.
• Move the blinking cursor to select a character.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
 68 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the
beginning.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r
T i m e 1 _ s
> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s
T i m e 2 2 . 0 s
O V 1 2 0 . 0 V
U V 6 0 . 0 V
Z P S 2 0 . 0 V
N P S 2 0 . 0 V
• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Press the
▼▲
or key to set a desired value. The value can be raised or lowered by pressing
▲
the or key. ,
• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical
value.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the line that is to be corrected by
pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.
To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are
not yet used for operation, although they are stored in memory. To validate the new settings, take
the following steps.
• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set.
(change)" sub-menu.
 69 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to commence operation using the new
settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen
will return to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries
that have been made so far and to return to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
• Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password in the same manner as that of "Setting" above.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
 70 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password
again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. The data will be attached to records.
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
> P l a n t n a m e
• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
• To enter the name for Alarm∗, select "Alarm∗" on the "Description" screen.
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `  
• Enter the text string.
 71 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with Modbus or optional communication, the relay address must be set. Do this
as follows:
• Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.
• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2 C o m m s
＞ A d d r . / P a r a m .
S w i t c h
• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m .
M o d b u s _
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
> M o d b u s 1
I E C 1 comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I P 1 ‐ 1 0
I P 1 ‐ 2 0
I P 1 ‐ 3 0
I P 1 ‐ 4 0
S M 1 ‐ 1 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of
S M 1 ‐ 2 0 communication type is A-D.
S M 1 ‐ 3 0
S M 1 ‐ 4 0
G W 1 ‐ 1 0
G W 1 ‐ 2 0
G W 1 ‐ 3 0
G W 1 ‐ 4 0
I P 2 ‐ 1 0
I P 2 ‐ 2 0
I P 2 ‐ 3 0
I P 2 ‐ 4 0
This setting is displayed if submodel of
S M 2 ‐ 1 0
S M 2 ‐ 2 0 communication type is B or D.
S M 2 ‐ 3 0
S M 2 ‐ 4 0
G W 2 ‐ 1 0
G W 2 ‐ 2 0
G W 2 ‐ 3 0
G W 2 ‐ 4 0
 72 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
I E C B 1 1
I E C B 2 2
I E C B 3 3
I E C B 4 4
I E C G T 1
I E C A T 1
I E C B T 1
I E C C T 1 This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in

I E C E 1 0
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I E C E 2 0
I E C E 3 0
I E C E 4 0
I E C E 5 0
I E C E 6 0
I E C E 7 0
I E C E 8 0
I E C I 1 0
I E C I 2 0
I E C I 3 0
I E C I 4 0
I E C I 5 0
I E C I 6 0
I E C I 7 0
I E C I 8 0
I E C 2 B 1 1
I E C 2 B 2 2
I E C 2 B 3 3
I E C 2 B 4 4
I E C 2 G T 1
I E C 2 A T 1 This setting is displayed if submodel of

I E C 2 B T 1 communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in comms
switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I E C 2 C T 1
I E C 2 E 1 0
I E C 2 E 2 0
I E C 2 E 3 0
I E C 2 E 4 0
I E C 2 E 5 0
I E C 2 E 6 0
I E C 2 E 7 0
I E C 2 E 8 0
I E C 2 I 1 0
I E C 2 I 2 0
 73 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
I E C 2 I 3 0
I E C 2 I 4 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of communication
I E C 2 I 5 0 type is 2 and “RS485P” in comms switch settimg

is ”IEC103”.
I E C 2 I 6 0
I E C 2 I 7 0
I E C 2 I 8 0
This setting is displayed if submodel of communication
S M O D E 0 type is A-D.
G O I N T 1 s
D E A D T 1 s type is A-D and “RS485P” in comms switch settimg
is ”off”.
• Enter the relay address number on the "Modbus" line for Modbus or the "IEC" line for
IEC60870-5-103 and press the ENTER key.
• Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for
GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI2-4. two SNTP servers are
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP
server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain
synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and synchronized
compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG2-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗ (IP1-1. IP1-2. IP1-3. IP1-4) and (IP2-1. IP2-2. IP2-3. IP2-4)
SM1-1 to SM2-4, GW1-1 to GW2-4, SI1-1 to SI2-4: same as above.
• Press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not duplicate the relay address number.
Settings for IEC60870-5-103 communication

The lines "IECB1" to "IECB4" are used for auxiliary inputs for IEC103 events INF27 to INF30
in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECB1" to "IECB4" by entering the number
corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.
The lines "IECGT" to "IECCT" are used for fault indications for IEC103 events INF68 to INF71
in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECGT" to "IECCT" by entering the BO numbers
(1 to 8) corresponding to the binary output settings.
The lines "IECE1" to "IECE8" are used to assign the signals for user customization. Assign
signals to the columns "IECE1" to "IECE8" by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B.
Note: Assign "0" to the column when the function is not used.
The lines "IECI1" to "IECI8" are used to assign the above signals from "IECE1" to "IECE8" to
each INF number. Enter the INF number to the columns "IECI1" to "IECI8".
Settings for IEC61850 communication

Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE
message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time of IEC 16850
communication.
Setting for Modbus communication
 74 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., for Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 and IEC61850.
/ 3 S w i t c h
R S 4 8 5 B R
> R S 4 8 5 B R
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in comms
I E C B L K 0
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
R S 4 8 5 P 0
O f f / M o d / I E C 1 0 3
E t h e r P 0
O f f / I E C 6 1 8 5 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of

6 1 8 5 0 B L K 0 communication type is A-D and “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”off”.
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
T S T M O D 0
O f f / O n
G S E C H K 0
O f f / O n
P I N G C H K 0
type is A0-D0.
O f f / O n
I E C G I 1 0
N o / Y e s
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
I E C G I 2 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 3 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 4 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 5 0
N o / Y e s This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
I E C G I 6 0 comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.

N o / Y e s
I E C G I 7 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 8 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 1 0
N o / Y e s
communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
I E C 2 G I 2 0
N o / Y e s
 75 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
I E C 2 G I 3 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 4 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 5 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of
N o / Y e s communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in comms
I E C 2 G I 6 0 switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 7 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 8 0
N o / Y e s
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in comms
I E C N F I 0
1 . 2 / 2 . 4
<RS485BR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols are applied.
<IECBLK>
Enter 1(=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
<IECNFI >
This line is to select the normalized factor (1.2 or 2.4) of the current measurand.
<IECGI1 - 8 >
These lines are to use the GI (General Interrogation) or not for user customized signals. If GI is to be
used , enter 1(=Yes).
<RS485P>
This line is to select the communication protocol when the MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 system
applied.
<EtherP>
This line is to select the communication protocol when the IEC61850 system applied.
<61850BLK>
Select 1 (=Blocked) to block transmission from relay to BCU for IEC61850 communication. When
using the IEC61850 communication, select 0 (=Normal).
<TSTMOD>
Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.
<GSECHK>
This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
<PINGCHK>
This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address which
is set on PG∗-∗.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.
 76 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Select the number and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/ 2 R e c o r d
> E v e n t
D i s t u r b a n c e
C o u n t e r
Setting the event recording

/ 3 E v e n t
B I 1 c o m m . _
> B I 1 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 2 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 3 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 4 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 5 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 6 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
• Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and
press the ENTER key.
Setting the disturbance recording

> T i m e / S t a r t e r
S c h e m e s w
B i n a r y s i g .
• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.
 77 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r
T i m e 1 _ s
> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s
T i m e 2 2 . 0 s
O V 1 2 0 . 0 V
U V 6 0 . 0 V
Z P S 2 0 . 0 V
N P S 2 0 . 0 V
• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to either used or not used, do the following:
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p _
> T r i p 1
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O V 1
O f f / O n
U V 1
O f f / O n
Z P S 1
O f f / O n
N P S 1
O f f / O n
F R Q 1
O f f / O n
D F R Q 1
O f f / O n
• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
• Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .
S I G 1 _
> S I G 1 5 1
S I G 2 5 1
S I G 3 5 1
S I G 4 5 1
 78 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
S I G 3 2 5 1
• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix A.
Setting the counter

/ 3 C o u n t e r
> S c h e m e s w
A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to either used or not used , do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T C S P E N _
> T C S P E N 1
O f f / O n / O p t - O n
C B S M E N 1
O f f / O n
T C A E N 1
O f f / O n
• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set the threshold setting, do the following:
• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4 A l a r m s e t
T C A L M _
> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0
• Enter the threshold settings.
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
> M e t e r i n g
T i m e s y n c .
T i m e z o n e
communication type is A-D.
 79 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the metering

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
D i s p l a y _
> D i s p l a y 1
P r i / S e c
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Pri.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).
Enter 1(=Sec.) to display the secondary side voltage.
Setting the time synchronization

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus or
IEC103 or SNTP. This is selected by setting as follows.
• Select "Time sync." to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .
T i m e s y n c . _
> T i m e s y n c . 1
O f f / B I / M o d / 1 0 3 /
S N T P
• Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=Mod) to be synchronised with the Modbus.
Enter 3(=103) to be synchronised with the IEC103.
Enter 4(=SNTP) to be synchronised with the SNTP.
Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in "Status"
sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone
When the calendar clock is synchronized with the SNTP time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
• Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hours) and
 80 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
GMTm (minutes), and press the ENTER key.
/ 3 T i m e z o n e .
G M T _
> G M T + 0 h r s
G M T m + 0 m i n
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRE130 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
> C h a n g e a c t . g p .
C h a n g e s e t
C o p y g p .
Changing the active group

• Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . _
> A c t i v e g p . 1
• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:
• Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 1
> C o m m o n
G r o u p 1
G r o u p 2
 81 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Changing the Common settings

• Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the
ENTER key.
/ 4 C o m m o n
A P P L _
> A P P L 1
1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P / 2 P Z
3 P N / 3 P V / 3 P P
A O L E D
O f f / O n
<APPL>
• Enter 0(=1PP), 1(=1PN), 3(=2PP), 4(=2PZ), 5(=3PN), 6(=3PV) or 7(=3PP) to set the voltage
input state and press the ENTER key.
<AOLED>
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED light when an alarm element is output.
• Enter 1 (=On) to illuminate the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the
ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Changing the Group settings

• Select the "Group∗" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/ 4 G r o u p ＊
> P a r a m e t e r
T r i p
Setting the parameter

Enter the line name, the VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:
• Select "Parameter" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
> L i n e n a m e
V T r a t i o
• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.

• Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.
• Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.
 82 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 6 V T r a t i o
P V T _
> P V T 1 0 0
R V T 1 0 0
• Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
• Select "Trip" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
> S c h e m e s w
P r o t . e l e m e n t
Setting the scheme switch

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
> A p p l i c a t i o n
O V p r o t .
U V p r o t .
Z P S p r o t .
N P S p r o t .
F R Q p r o t .
Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.
• Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n
S V C N T _
> S V C N T 1
A L M & B L K / A L M
<SVCNT>
Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic
supervision and AC input imbalance supervision.
• Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the
ENTER key.
 83 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the OV protection

The settings for the OV protection are as follows:
• Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7 O V p r o t .
O V 1 E N _
> O V 1 E N 1
O f f / D T / I M D T / C
O V 2 E N 1
O V 3 E N 1
O f f / O n
<OV1EN>, <OV2EN>
To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.
• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If
disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<OV3EN>
• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3, enter 0
(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the UV protection

The settings for the UV protection are as follows:
• Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7 U V p r o t .
U V 1 E N _
> U V 1 E N 1
U V 2 E N 1
U V 3 E N 1
O f f / O n
V B L K E N 1
O f f / O n
 84 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
<UV1EN>, <UV2EN>
To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.
disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<UV3EN>
• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3, enter 0
(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<VBLKEN>
• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV
blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the ZPS Protection

The settings for the ZPS protection are as follows:
• Select "ZPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.
/ 7 Z P S p r o t
Z P S 1 E N _
> Z P S 1 E N 1
O f f / D T / I D M T / C
Z P S 2 E N 1
<ZPS1EN>, <ZPS2EN>
To set the ZPS1 and ZPS2 time delayed type, do the following.
disabling the ZPS1 or ZPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 85 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the NPS protection

The settings for the NPS protection are as follows:
• Select "NPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NPS" screen.
/ 7 N P S p r o t
N P S 1 E N _
> N P S 1 E N 1
N P S 2 E N 1
<NPS1EN>, <NPS2EN>
To set the NPS1 and NPS2 time delayed type, do the following.
disabling the NPS1 or NPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the FRQ protection

The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:
• Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7 F R Q p r o t
F T 1 _
> F T 1 1
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 1 1
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 1
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
F T 2 0
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 2 0
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 2
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
F T 3 0
 86 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 3 0
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 3
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
F T 4 0
O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U
D F T 4 0
O f f / R / D / B o t h
L o g i c 4
L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5
<FT1>,<FT2>,<FT3>,<FT4>
FT1, FT2, FT3 and FT4 select the frequency protection.

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (=Off) not to use the frequency protection.
Enter 1 (=O) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used.
Enter 2 (=U) to use the F11 element for underfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used
Enter 3 (=B) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection and the F12 element for
underfrequency protection.
Enter 4 (=OO) to use the F11 and F12 elements for overfrequency protection.
Enter 5 (=UU) to use the F11 and F12 elements for underfrequency protection.
<DFT1>, <DFT2>, <DFT3>, <DFT4>
DFT1, DFT2, DFT3 and DFT4 select the frequency rate-of-change protection.
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the frequency rise rate nor frequency decay rate protection.
Enter 1 (= R) to use only the frequency rise rate protection.
Enter 2 (= D) to use only the frequency decay rate protection.
Enter 3 (= Both) to use both the frequency rise rate and frequency decay rate protections.
<Logic 1>, <Logic 2>, <Logic3>, <Logic 4>
Logic 1, Logic 2, Logic 3 and Logic 4 select the tripping combination of the frequency protection
and the frequency rate-of-change protection.
• Enter 0 (=L1) or 1 (=L2) or 2 (=L3) or 3 (=L4) or 4 (=L5) and press the ENTER key.
Refer to Table 2.2.1 for setting.
Setting the protection elements

To set the protection elements, do the following.
• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
 87 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t
> O V p r o t .
U V p r o t .
Z P S p r o t
N P S p r o t
F R Q p r o t
Setting the OV elements

• Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.
/ 7 O V p r o t .
O V 1 _ V
> O V 1 1 0 . 0 V OV1 Threshold setting.

T O V 1 1 . 0 0 S OV1 Definite time delay.
T O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T O V 1 R 0 . 0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay.
O V 1 D P R 9 5 % OV1 DO/PU ratio
O V 2 1 0 . 0 V OV2 Threshold setting.

T O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T O V 2 R 0 . 0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay.
O V 2 D P R 9 5 % OV2 DO/PU ratio
O V 3 1 0 . 0 V OV3 Threshold setting.
O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
O V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 ditto
O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

O V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
O V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
 88 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the UV elements

• Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.
/ 7 U V p r o t .
U V 1 _ V
> U V 1 5 . 0 V UV1 Threshold setting.

T U V 1 0 . 0 5 S UV1 Definite time delay.
T U V 1 M 0 . 0 5 UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T U V 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay.
U V 2 4 0 . 0 V UV2 Threshold setting.
T U V 2 M 0 . 0 5 UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T U V 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay.
U V 3 1 0 . 0 V UV3 Threshold setting.
V B L K 1 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold
U V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
U V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
U V 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
U V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

U V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
U V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Setting the ZPS elements

• Select "ZPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.
/ 7 Z P S p r o t
Z P S 1 _ V
> Z P S 1 5 . 0 V ZPS1 Threshold setting.

T Z P S 1 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 1 Definite time delay.
T Z P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T Z P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 1 Definite time reset delay.
Z P S 2 4 0 . 0 V ZPS 2 Threshold setting.
 89 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
T Z P S 2 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 2 Definite time delay.

T Z P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T Z P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 2 Definite time reset delay.
Z P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
Z P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
Z P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Z P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

Z P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
Z P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
Setting the NPS protection elements

• Select "NPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NPS" screen.
/ 7 N P S p r o t
N P S 1 _ V
> N P S 1 5 . 0 V NPS1 Threshold setting.

T N P S 1 0 . 0 5 S NPS 1 Definite time delay.
T N P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T N P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 1 Definite time reset delay.
N P S 2 4 0 . 0 V NPS 2 Threshold setting.
T N P S 2 0 . 0 5 S NPS 2 Definite time delay.
T N P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting.
T N P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 2 Definite time reset delay.
N P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
N P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
N P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
N P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

N P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto
N P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto
 90 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the FRQ elements

• Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.
/ 7 F R Q p r o t
F 1 1 _ H z
> F 1 1 5 . 0 H z F11 for FRQ1 threshold setting.

T F 1 1 0 . 0 5 S F11 Definite time delay.
F 1 2 5 . 0 H z F12 for FRQ1 Threshold setting.
D F 1 0 . 5 H z / s DF1 for FRQ1 of DFRQ1 Threshold setting.
F 2 1 5 . 0 H z F21 for FRQ2 threshold setting.

 91 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting group copy

To copy the settings from one settings group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3 C ｏｐｙ A t o B
> A _
B _
• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
> B I S t a t u s
B I 1
B I 2
B I 3
B I 4
B I 5
B I 6
A l a r m 1 T e x t
A l a r m 2 T e x t
A l a r m 3 T e x t
A l a r m 4 T e x t
Setting Binary Input Status
The binary input nominal operating voltage can be selected in GRE130. Control voltages of 24V,
48V, 110V and 220V are supported.
BI1 and BI2 can be set to one of three nominal voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)
BI3 to BI6 can be set to one of two nominal voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)
Note: The nominal voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Supervision using 2
Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.
The threshold voltage options of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to the dc auxiliary voltage
supply rating of the relay models.
To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:
• Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.
 92 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/ 3 B I S t a t u s
B I T H R 1
> B I T H R 1 1
4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0
B I T H R 2 0
1 1 0 / 2 2 0
<BITHR1>
To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 1 and 2 , do the following.
• Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
<BITHR2>
To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 3 to 6 , do the following.
• Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
Selection of Binary Input

• Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.
/ 3 B I 1
> T i m e r s
F u n c t i o n s
Setting Alarm ∗ Text
If the BI selected is used for an alarm, an alarm message can be set.

• Select the Alarm∗ text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `  
• Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.
 93 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting timers
• Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s
B I 1 P U D _ s
> B I 1 P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting

B I 1 D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
Setting Functions
• Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n
B I 1 S N S _
> B I 1 S N S 0
N o r m / I n v
B I 1 S G S 0
O f f / 1 / 2
O V 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O V 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O V 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U V 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U V 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U V 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
Z P S B L K 0
O f f / O n
N P S B L K 0
O f f / O n
F R Q B L K 0
O f f / O n
• To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
 94 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
<BI1SNS>
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
<BI1SGS>
To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) and press the ENTER key.
<Others>
• Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRE130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix G shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
2 B i n a r y O / P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
B O 5 Available for model 412.
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 95 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/ 3 B O ∗
> L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Setting the logic gate type and timer

• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D I / D w / L a t
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing

and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 －－－
I n ♯ 2 －－－
I n ♯ 3 －－－
I n ♯ 4 －－－
T B O 0 . 2 0 s
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix A. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 176 (signal names: "BO1 OP"
to "BO8 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
 96 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when the control function is enabled.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Six of the LEDs provided by the GRE130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate an OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status of
which can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix A can be
assigned to each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by pressing
the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
> L E D
V i r t u a l L E D
Selection of real LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/ 4 L E D ∗
F u n c t i o n s
L E D C o l o r
 97 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting the logic gate type and reset type

L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1 _
> I n # 1 －－－
I n # 2 －－－
I n # 3 －－－
I n # 4 －－－
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix A.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Setting the LED color

• Select "LED color" on the "LED∗ " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the "LED
color" screen.
/ 5 L E D C o l o r
C o l o r _
> C o l o r 0
R / G / Y
 98 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Select the LED color from red, green or yellow.

Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.
Selection of virtual LEDs

• Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
> I N D 1
I N D 2
• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.
/ 4 I N D 1
> R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Setting the reset timing

• Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e t
R e s e t _
> R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F n c t i o n s
B I T 1 _
> B I T 1 －－－
B I T 2 －－－
B I T 3 －－－
B I T 4 －－－
B I T 5 －－－
B I T 6 －－－
B I T 7 －－－
B I T 8 －－－
 99 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix A.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

4.2.6.11 Control
The GRE130 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by using the front panel keys.
The interlock function can be used to block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command with interlock
signals from binary inputs or from a communication command.
To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:
• Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/ 2 C o n t r o l
C o n t r o l _
> C o n t r o l 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
I n t e r l o c k 0
• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function to be in use or not in use and press
the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function to be in use or not in use and
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.6.12 Frequency
Setting of the system frequency for the GRE130 relay for 50Hz or 60Hz.
To change the system frequency, do the following:
• Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.
/ 2 F r e q u e n c y
F r e q u e n c y _
> F r e q u e n c y 0
5 0 H z / 6 0 H z
• Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the
ENTER key.
 100 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
CAUTION
When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE130 must reboot to enable the
setting change.
When having changed the system frequency, the frequency protection setting value must be
changed for the system frequency.
4.2.7 Control
The sub-menu "Control" enables the Circuit Breaker(CB) control function from the front panel keys
- ○ , ｜ and L/R .
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control

The "Local/Remote" function provides for change of CB control hierarchy.
• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
L o c a l / R e m o t e
C B c l o s e / o p e n
• Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on the LCD.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
> L o c a l / R e m o t e
C B c l o s e / o p e n
• The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.
4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control

The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.
• Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
L o c a l / R e m o t e
> C B c l o s e / o p e n
• The ｜ and ○ keys are enabled to control the CB – close / open.
 101 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2.7.3 Password
For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
C o n t r o l
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
C o n t r o l
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
"Unmatch passwd!"
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the control screens.
If "Control" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Control"
sub-menu screens.
C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
 102 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The password protection for the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.8 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs.
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.
4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch
The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure of the items that are being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
• Select "Test" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
> P a s s w o r d ( T e s t )
S w i t c h
B i n a r y O / P
• Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.
/ 2 S w i t h
A . M . F _
> A . M . F 1
O f f / O n
U V T S T 0
O f f / O n
• Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the
ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay
It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections to external
 103 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
F A I L 0
• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to forcibly operate the output relays.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
• Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.8.3 Password
For the sake of security during testing, password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
T e s t
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
 104 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
T e s t
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
"Unmatch passwd!"
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Test" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Test" sub-menu
screens.
T e s t
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen will go off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is cancelled. Set the password
again.
 105 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel.
Using a personal computer, the following analysis and display of fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
• Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display
• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
For details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 Modbus Interface

GRE130 supports the Modbus communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the
relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement and
status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)
• Measurement data: current
• Status data: events, fault indications, counters, etc.
• Setting data
• Remote CB operation: Open / Close
• Time setting / synchronization
The protocol can be used via the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See Section
4.2.6.4.
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRE130 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used
when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurand
and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix N.)
• Measurand data: current
• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2
and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication

GRE130 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard with the
provision of an optional communication board. Station bus communication as specified in IEC
61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within a substation control and automation system via
Ethernet LAN.
 106 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC 61850
communication.
or TX
Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network
4.7 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
• Event records
• Disturbance records
• Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary time
standard input signal or Modbus. This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by
the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express
year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of
milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input
every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec (n+1) sec

500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in separate volume "PC
INTERFACE RSM100" and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar
clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with an
external time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
 107 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.8 Special Mode

The GRE130 will enter the following special mode using a specific key operation.
• LCD contrast adjustment mode
• Light check mode
LCD contrast adjustment mode
When the LCD is not evident or not displayed clearly, it may be that the contrast adjustment for the
LCD may not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any of the screens, do the
following:
• Press ▼ and ▲ ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to the LCD contrast adjustment
mode.
L C D C o n t r a s t
■ ■ ■ ■
• Press the
▲
or key to adjust the contrast.
LCD and LED check mode
To exercise the LCD and LED check , do the following.

• Press
▲
key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.

• While pressing
▲
key all LEDs are lit and white dots will appear on the whole LCD screen.
The colors of the configurable LEDs (LED1-6) can be chosen in the user setting color.
CB CLOSED CB OPEN LOCAL REMOTE
IN SERVICE
TRIP
User configurable
LEDs (LED1-6)
ALARM
RELAY FAIL
• Release
▲
key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.
 108 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out an acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for
damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting

The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.
Appendix E shows the case outlines.
127
5
14
117 13 5
Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit
The attachment kits can be mounted on a panel thickness of 1 – 2.5mm when the M4x8 screws
included with the kit are used. When mounted on a panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws
together with some spacing washers should be used.
5.2.1 Flush Mounting
For flush mounting in a panel cut-out;

・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.
・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.
・Tighten the M4 screws from the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.
The allowed range for the fixing screw tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.
Do not tighten the screws too tightly.
 109 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(a) model 410A and 411A
+0.2
217 -0.2
+0.2
-0.2
160
(b) model 412A
Fig. 5.2.2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out
 110 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE130 showing the positions of the mounting attachment kit
(a) model 410A, 411A (b) model 412A
Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of GRE130 showing the screw location for the mounting attachment kits
5.2.2 Dimensions
5.2.2.1 Power Supply

The power supply for the relay can be either DC (range 24-48Vdc, 48-110Vdc, 110-250Vdc) or AC
(110-220Vac-50/60Hz). The voltage range is specified on the relay indicator plate on the front face.
On models 410A and 411A, the power supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of TB1
and the earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB1.
On model 412A, the power supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of TB2 and the
 111 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB2.

A minimum 1.25mm2 wire size recommended.
5.2.2.2 Analogue inputs

GRE130-410A, 411A and 412A have 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth voltage.
On models 410A and 411A, the voltage inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 8 of TB1.
A minimum 2.5 mm2 wire size recommended.
The voltage input and power supply terminals (TB1 or TB2) can be connected from both sides.
5.2.2.3 Binary inputs

The relay has 2 (or 6) opto-insulated logic inputs. Each input has is separately powered with a dc
voltage.
On models 410A and 411A, the binary inputs should be connected to terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of
TB2.
On model 412A, the binary inputs should be connected to terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of TB3.
A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.
5.2.2.4 Binary outputs (Output relays)

Five output relays are available on the relay. Four relays are programmable, the last relay being
assigned to the signaling of a relay fault. BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil
connection.
On models 410A and 411A, the binary outputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 10 of TB2.
On model 412A, the binary outputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 10 of TB3.
A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.
5.2.2.5 RS485 port

The communication connection (RS485 port) is assigned to terminals 21, 23 and 24 of TB2 at model
410A and 411A or TB3 at model 412A. The total length of twisted pair wires should not exceed 1200
m.
The transmission wires should be terminated using a 120Ω resistor at both extreme ends of the cable.
The binary input , binary output and RS485 communication terminal is a single side connected
terminal block.
The relay terminal block size and the clearance between the terminals are shown at Fig 5.2.4.
 112 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
17 24 17 24 42
TB2 TB3 TB2 TB1

TB1
6.35
8.7
8.7
6.35
6.35
7.62
10.0
10.0
7.62
7.62
(a) model 410A1 and 411A (b) model 412A
Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of the relay
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are
very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause
serious damage. Often, this damage may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do
not expose them to risk of damage.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices. However,
if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to preserve the high
reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.
CAUTION
• Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
• Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
• Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried out
in a Special Handling Area.
 113 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.
5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE130

GRE130 has optional case model S1-GRE130. Details are shown in 6F2T0195.
 114 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRE130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully utilised.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
• When connecting the cable to the rear of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided for the terminal block .
• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
 115 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
CAUTION
• When the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
• Before turning the power on, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
• Be careful to ensure that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source
1 Three-phase voltage source
1 power supply
3 Phase angle meter
3 AC ammeter
3 AC voltmeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage and frequency ratings, and auxiliary
supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it to the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100
software is required to run the PC.
For full details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
 116 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current and voltage
sources are required.
The testing circuit figures used in this chapter show the circuit diagram for the 410A and 411A
models. In the case of the 412A model, TB1 replaces TB2 and TB2 replaces TB3.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD ･LED display
• Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit
green.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is applied.
• Press
▲
key for 3 seconds or longer and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and
that all LEDs are lit.
Operation keys
• Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN
MENU" screen. Press any keys to check that they operate.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
GRE130
TB2 -13
BI1
-14 BI2
BI3
BI4
- 19 BI5
BI6
- 20
+ TB1 - 13
power
supply − - 14
-12
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 117 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]
• Apply the rated supply voltage to terminals 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal block
TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test from one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers and
output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays
the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
F A I L 0
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed
collectively.
 118 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
O p e r a t e ?
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying check currents to the AC input circuits and verifying that the
values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
GRE130
V
TB1
-1 VA
Three-phase -2
voltage -3 VB
source
-4
-5 VC
-6
V
Single-phase -7
voltage
source -8
+ TB1 -13
power
supply
− -14
12
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the following.

"Set. (view)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
• Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within ±5% of the input values.
 119 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5 Function Test

CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1 Measuring Element

Measuring element characteristics are realized using software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable
LED or a binary output relay.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".
CAUTION
• Use test equipment with more than 1 kΩ of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
• Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
• Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In the case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.
Note: The operating time test for the relay measuring elements at monitoring jacks A or B does
not include operation of the binary output. An overall operating time test, if required,
should be measured at a binary output relay.
Assigning signals to LEDs
• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
> L E D
V i r t u a l L E D
• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 120 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/ 4 L E D ∗
F u n c t i o n s
L E D C o l o r
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _
I n ♯ 2 _ _ _
I n ♯ 3 _ _ _
I n ♯ 4 _ _ _
• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,
and assign other gates to “0”.
Assigning signals to Binary Output Relays

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
 121 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used,
enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/ 3 B O ∗
F u n c t i o n s
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D l / D w / L a t
• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1
_ _ _
I n ♯ 2
_ _ _
I n ♯ 3
_ _ _
I n ♯ 4
_ _ _
T B O 0 . 2 0 s
• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix A
and assign other gates to “0”.
 122 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements

GRE130
V TB 1
+ -1
Variable-
− -2
Voltage source
+ TB1 -13
power
supply − -14
-12
(∗ ) :Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit
Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element Signal No. Element Signal No.
OV1 101 UV1 122
OV2 108 UV2 126
OV3 115 UV3 130
ZPS1 134 ZPS2 135
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
• Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, ZPS1, ZPS2

• Apply rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.
• Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.
Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3

• Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.
• Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.
Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZPS1 IDMT curves

• Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.
 123 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvoltage element NPS1 and NPS2

GRE130
V
Va TB1 -1
Three-phase Vb
Voltage -3
source
Vc
-5
VN
-6
+ TB1 -13
power
supply
− -14
-12
Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element Signal No.
NPS1 136
NPS2 137
• Apply a three-phase balanced voltage and the check the value of the operating voltage by
increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
Operating time check of NPS1 IDMT curve

• Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the
operating time.
• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.
 124 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements

GRE130
V f TB1
+ -1
Variable-
Frequency /
− -2
Voltage source
+ TB1 -13
power
supply
− -14
-12
Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit
Frequency elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.
Element Signal No.
FRQ1 251
FRQ2 252
FRQ3 253
FRQ4 254
FVBLK 255
Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4

Note: Each element characteristic, overfrequency or underfrequency, is determined by the scheme
switch [FT1] to [FT4] settings. Check the scheme switch setting and characteristic of each element
before testing .
• Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.
For the overfrequency characteristic,
• Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within ± 0.005Hz of the setting.
For the underfrequency characteristics,
• Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the
measured value is within ± 0.005Hz of the setting.
Undervoltage block test, FVBLK

• Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency to operate an element.
• Maintain the frequency at which the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the
voltage applied from the rated voltage to less than the FVBLK setting voltage. And then,
check that the element resets.
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays operate after a simulated fault occurs.
 125 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record" screen
and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix B. There are internal events and external events from
binary input commands. Event recording from an external event can be checked by changing the
status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input
circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen
is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only
shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record" screen and
check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on
how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.6 Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system voltage
and their respective phase angles using the metering displays on the LCD screen.
• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen and check that no message appears.
• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.
/ 2 M e t e r i n g
V a * * . * * k V
V b * * . * * k V
V c * * . * * k V
V e s * * . * * k V
V a b * * . * * k V
V b c * * . * * k V
V c a * * . * * k V
V 1 * * * . * k V
V 2 * * * . * k V
V 0 * * . * * k V
f * * . * * H z
Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values for either the primary side or the secondary
side by a setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit, including the circuit breaker, is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it has tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.
 126 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Tripping circuit
• Set the breaker to be closed.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
F A I L 0
BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.
• Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD will display the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.
 127 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued from the binary output FAIL
relay and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable
Err: SUM ×(Flash memory)
Err: RAM ×(SRAM)
Err: BRAM ×(Backup RAM)
Err: EEP ×(EEPROM)
Err: A/D ×(A/D converter)
Err: V0, Err: V2 × (AC input circuit)(1) × (2)
Err: DRIVER × (BI,BO circuit)(1) × (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
* ; Error level set in VT supervision function.

Alarms detected by the relay self-supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on the
LCD. Table 6.7.2 shows LCD messages and alarm locations.
Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location
Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable
ALM: VT ×(AC input circuit)(1) × (2)
ALM: TC ×(Trip circuit)(1) × (2)
ALM: CB ×(Circuit breaker)(1) × (2)
ALM: TP COUNT ×(Trip count)(1) × (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.
 128 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
If there is no message is shown on the LCD it means that the failure location is either in the power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the power
supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in both
cases after checking if the correct voltage is applied to the relay.
If a failure is detected by the automatic supervision function or regular testing, replace the failed
relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during a regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Correct power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the
protection by replacing the relay.
Repairs at site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at component level is not
recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the relay to be replaced.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

• Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit when the power supply is
de-energized. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to
discharge.
• Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring in place.
• To remove the relay unit from the panel, the attachment screws must be removed.
• Insert the (spare) relay unit following the reverse procedure.
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:
• When the attachment kits are removed, support the relay to ensure that it does not fall from
panel.
• Ensure that the relay front cover panel is closed throughout the operation.
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
• Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
• Connect the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 129 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
• Check that all the external connections are correct.
• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are
correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are
recorded during the tests.
• Press ▼ key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.
• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
 130 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix A
Signal List
 131 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. SIGNAL Name Contents

0 Not in use
1 BI1 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI1
7 Not in use
8 Not in use
9 CONSTANT_0 Constant 0
10 CONSTANT_1 Constant 1
11 SET. GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1
12 SET. GROUP2 BI command of change active setting group2
13 Not in use
14 Not in use
15 OV1 BLOCK BI command of OV1 protection scheme block
18 UV1 BLOCK BI command of UV1 protection scheme block
21 ZPS1 BLOCK BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block
22 ZPS2 BLOCK BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block
23 NPS1 BLOCK BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block
24 NPS2 BLOCK BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block
25 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
26 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact
27 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact
28 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
29 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase)
30 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase)
31 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase)
32 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset
33 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronize Clock
34 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record
35 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1
39 Not in use
40 Not in use
 132 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

41 Not in use
42 FRQ1 BLOCK BI command of FRQ1 protection scheme block
46 Not in use
47 Not in use
48 Not in use
49 Not in use
50 OV1_INST-OR OV1 element start at IDMT setting.
51 OV1-A INST OV1-A relay element start at IDMT setting.
52 OV1-B INST OV1-B relay element start at IDMT setting.
53 OV1-C INST OV1-C relay element start at IDMT setting.
54 Not in use
55 Not in use
56 OV2_INST-OR OV2 element start at IDMT setting..
57 OV2-A INST OV2-A relay element start at IDMT setting.
58 OV2-B INST OV2-B relay element start at IDMT setting.
59 OV2-C INST OV2-C relay element start at IDMT setting.
60 Not in use
61 Not in use
62 Not in use
63 OV1-A OV1-A relay element output
64 OV1-B OV1-B relay element output
65 OV1-C OV1-C relay element output
72 UV1-A UV1-A relay element output
73 UV1-B UV1-B relay element output
74 UV1-C UV1-C relay element output
81 OV1-OR OV1 element start at DT settings.
82 OV1-A pick up OV1-A relay element start at DT settings.
83 OV1-B pick up OV1-B relay element start at DT settings.
84 OV1-C pick up OV1-C relay element start at DT settings.
 133 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

86 OV2-A pick up OV2-A relay element start at DT settings.
87 OV2-B pick up OV2-B relay element start at DT settings.
88 OV2-C pick up OV2-C relay element start at DT settings.
90 Not in use
91 Not in use
92 Not in use
93 ZPS1 ZPS1 relay element output
94 ZPS2 ZPS2 relay element output
95 NPS1 NPS1 relay element output
96 NPS2 NPS2 relay element output
97 UVBLK UV protection scheme block
98 Not in use
99 Not in use
100 Not in use
101 OV1 TRIP OV1 trip command
102 OV1-A TRIP OV1 trip command (A Phase)
103 OV1-B TRIP OV1 trip command (B Phase)
104 OV1-C TRIP OV1 trip command (C Phase)
105 Not in use
106 Not in use
107 Not in use
112 Not in use
113 Not in use
114 Not in use
119 Not in use
120 Not in use
121 FV BLOCK FRQ protection scheme block by UV element
122 UV1 TRIP UV1 trip command
123 UV1-A TRIP UV1 trip command (A Phase)
124 UV1-B TRIP UV1 trip command (B Phase)
125 UV1-C TRIP UV1 trip command (C Phase)
 134 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

134 ZPS1 TRIP ZPS1 trip command
135 ZPS2 ALARM ZPS2 alarm command
136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command
137 NPS2 ALARM NPS2 alarm command
138 Not in use
139 Not in use
140 Not in use
141 GEN.TRIP General Trip command
142 GEN.TRIP-A General Trip command (A Phase)
143 GEN.TRIP-B General Trip command (B Phase)
144 GEN.TRIP-C General Trip command (C Phase)
145 Not in use
146 Not in use
147 Not in use
148 Not in use
149 Not in use
150 GEN.ALARM General alarm command
151 ZPS1 pick-up ZPS1 element start at DT setting.
152 ZPS2 pick-up ZPS2 element start at DT setting.
153 NPS1 pick-up NPS1 element start at DT setting.
154 NPS2 pick-up NPS2 element start at DT setting.
155 UV1 INST-OR UV1 relay element start at IDMT setting
156 UV2 INST-OR UV2 relay element start at IDMT setting
157 UV1-A INST UV1-A relay element start at IDMT setting
158 UV1-B INST UV1-B relay element start at IDMT setting
159 UV1-C INST UV1-C relay element start at IDMT setting
160 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off
161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure
164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm
166 Not in use
167 Not in use
168 V0 ERR V0 error
169 V2 ERR V2 error
170 BO1OP Binary Output1 operated
 135 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

174 Not in use
175 Not in use
176 Not in use
177 UV2-A INST UV2-A relay element start at IDMT setting.
178 UV2-B INST UV2-B relay element start at IDMT setting.
179 UV2-C INST UV2-C relay element start at IDMT setting.
180 Not in use
181 LCD IND. LCD indication (Virtual LED) command
182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command
183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command
184 Not in use
185 Not in use
186 TESTING Testing LED lit output
187 Not in use
188 Not in use
189 Not in use
190 GEN PICKUP General start / pick-up output
191 NORM LED ON In service LED ON
192 TRIP LED ON TRIP LED ON
193 PROT COM ON IEC60870-5-103 protection command
194 IECTST IEC60870-5-103 communication test
195 IECBLK IEC60870-5-103 communication block
196 Not in use
197 ZPS1 INST ZPS1 relay element start at IDMT setting
198 ZPS2 INST ZPS2 relay element start at IDMT setting
199 NPS1 INST NPS1 relay element start at IDMT setting
200 NPS2 INST NPS2 relay element start at IDMT setting
201 BI1 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI1 after BI1SNS
211 F11 FRQ1 relay F11 element output
213 DF-R1 DFRQ1 relay rise element output
214 DF-D1 DFRQ1 relay decay element output
 136 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

222 DR-D3 DFRQ3 relay decay element output
227 Not in use
228 Not in use
229 Not in use
230 Not in use
231 F11 TRIP FRQ1 relay F11 Trip command
233 DF-R1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay rise Trip command
234 DF-D1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay decay Trip command
235 FRQ1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command
251 FRQ STAGE1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command
255 UV1-OR UV1 element start at DT settings.
256 UV1-A pick up UV1-A relay element start at DT settings.
257 UV1-B pick up UV1-B relay element start at DT settings.
258 UV1-C pick up UV1-C relay element start at DT settings.
 137 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

267 Not in use
268 Not in use
269 Not in use
270 LOCAL Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state
271 REMOTE Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state
272 CB_OPN_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open
273 CB_CLS_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close
274 CB_OPN_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker open
275 CB_CLS_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker close
276 CB_OPN_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker open
277 CB_CLC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker close
278 LOCK_BI BI command of Interlock
279 LOCK_COMM Communication command of Interlock
280 CB OPOUT Circuit Breaker Open output
281 CB CLOUT Circuit Breaker Close output
282 Not in use
283 Not in use
284 OV1I-A OV1-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting
285 OV1I-B OV1-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting
286 OV1I-C OV1-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting
287 OV2I-A OV2-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting
288 OV2I-B OV2-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting
289 OV2I-C OV2-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting
290 ZPS1I-A ZPS1 integrated value holding at IDMT setting
291 NPS1I-B NPS1 integrated value holding at IDMT setting
292 ZPS2I-C ZPS2 integrated value holding at IDMT setting
293 NPS2I-A NPS2 integrated value holding at IDMT setting
294 UV1I-A UV1-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting
295 UV1I-B UV1-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting
296 UV1I-C UV1-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting
297 UV2I-A UV2-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting
298 UV2I-B UV2-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting
299 UV2I-C UV2-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting
300 Not in use
301 ETH1_LINKUP Ether port 1 LINK-UP
302 ETH2_LINKUP Ether port 2 LINK-UP
303 IEC61850 RUN IEC61850 RUN
304 GOOSE IN Q1 Goose quality#1
 138 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

320 GOOSE IN 1 Goose data#1
350 TEMP001 Temporally output signal

 139 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix B
Event Record Items
 140 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ID. LCD indication Contents

1 GEN.trip Off / On General trip command
2 GEN.trip-A Off / On General trip command (A Phase)
3 GEN.trip-B Off / On General trip command (B Phase)
4 GEN.trip-C Off / On General trip command (C Phase)
5 GEN.trip-AB Off / On General trip command (A-B Phase)
6 GEN.trip-BC Off / On General trip command (B-C Phase)
7 GEN.trip-CA Off / On General trip command (C-A Phase)
8 OV1-A trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A Phase)
9 OV1-B trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B Phase)
10 OV1-C trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C Phase)
11 OV2-A trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A Phase)
12 OV2-B trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B Phase)
13 OV2-C trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C Phase)
14 OV3-A alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A Phase)
15 OV3-B alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B Phase)
16 OV3-C alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C Phase)
17 UV1-A trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A Phase)
18 UV1-B trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B Phase)
19 UV1-C trip Off / On UV1 trip command (C Phase)
20 UV2-A trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A Phase)
21 UV2-B trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B Phase)
22 UV2-C trip Off / On UV2 trip command (C Phase)
23 UV3-A alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A Phase)
24 UV3-B alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B Phase)
25 UV3-C alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C Phase)
26 OV1-AB trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A-B Phase)
27 OV1-BC trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B-C Phase)
28 OV1-CA trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C-A Phase)
29 OV2-AB trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A-B Phase)
30 OV2-BC trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B-C Phase)
31 OV2-CA trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C-A Phase)
32 OV3-AB alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)
33 OV3-BC alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)
34 OV3-CA alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)
35 UV1-AB trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A-B Phase)
36 UV1-BC trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B-C Phase)
37 UV1-CA trip Off / On UV1 trip command(C-A Phase)
38 UV2-AB trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A-B Phase)
39 UV2-BC trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B-C Phase)
40 UV2-CA trip Off / On UV2 trip command(C-A Phase)
41 UV3-AB alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A-B Phase)
42 UV3-BC alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)
 141 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents

43 UV3-CA alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C-A Phase)
44 OV1 trip Off / On OV1 trip command
47 UV1 trip Off / On UV1 trip command
50 ZPS1 trip Off / On ZPS1 trip command
51 ZPS2 alarm Off / On ZPS2 alarm command
52 NPS1 trip Off / On NPS1 trip command
53 NPS2 alarm Off / On NPS2 alarm command
54 OV1-A Off / On OV1-A relay element operating
55 OV1-B Off / On OV1-B relay element operating
56 OV1-C Off / On OV1-C relay element operating
63 UV1-A Off / On UV1-A relay element operating
64 UV1-B Off / On UV1-B relay element operating
65 UV1-C Off / On UV1-C relay element operating
72 OV1-AB Off / On OV1-AB relay element operating
73 OV1-BC Off / On OV1-BC relay element operating
74 OV1-CA Off / On OV1-CA relay element operating
81 UV1-AB Off / On UV1-AB relay element operating
82 UV1-BC Off / On UV1-BC relay element operating
83 UV1-CA Off / On UV1-CA relay element operating
 142 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents

90 OV1 Off / On OV1 relay element operating
93 UV1 Off / On UV1 relay element operating
96 ZPS1 Off / On ZPS1 relay element operating
97 ZPS2 Off / On ZPS2 relay element operating
98 NPS1 Off / On NPS1 relay element operating
99 NPS2 Off / On NPS2 relay element operating
100 UVBLK Off / On UVBLK element operating
101 BI1 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI1
107 SET. group1 Off / On BI command of change active setting group1
108 SET. group2 Off / On BI command of change active setting group2
109 OV1 block Off / On BI command of OV1 protection scheme block
112 UV1 block Off / On BI command of UV1 protection scheme block
115 ZPS1 block Off / On BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block
116 ZPS2 block Off / On BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block
117 NPS1 block Off / On BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block
118 NPS2 block Off / On BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block
119 TC fail Off / On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
120 CB CONT OPN Off / On BI command of CB N/O contact
121 CB CONT CLS Off / On BI command of CB N/C contact
122 EXT trip-3PH Off / On BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
123 EXT trip-APH Off / On BI command of External trip (A Phase)
124 EXT trip-BPH Off / On BI command of External trip (B Phase)
125 EXT trip-CPH Off / On BI command of External trip (C Phase)
126 Remote reset Off / On BI command of Remote reset
127 SYNC Off / On
128 Store record Off / On BI command of Store Disturbance Record
129 Alarm1 Off / On BI command of Alarm1
133 Relay fail Off / On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
 143 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents No.

134 Relay fail-A Off / On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
135 TC err Off / On Trip circuit supervision failure
136 CB err Off / On Circuit Breaker failure
137 V0 err Off / On Zero phase input circuit failure
138 V2 err Off / On VT circuit supervision failure
139 TP COUNT ALM Off / On Trip counter alarm
140 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records
141 E.record CLR On Clear Event records
142 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records
143 TP COUNT On Clear Trip counter
144 IND.reset On Reset indication for Trip mode, Alarm etc.
Record and time for data lost with power supply
145 Data lost On
de-energized for an extended period
146 Sys.Set Change On System setting change command
147 Rly.Set Change On Relay setting change command
148 Grp.Set Change On Group setting change command
149 OV1-A INST Off / On OV1-A relay element start
150 OV1-B INST Off / On OV1-B relay element start
151 OV1-C INST Off / On OV1-C relay element start
152 OV2-A INST Off / On OV2-A relay element start
153 OV2-B INST Off / On OV2-B relay element start
154 OV2-C INST Off / On OV2-C relay element start
155 UV1-A INST Off / On UV1-A relay element start
156 UV1-B INST Off / On UV1-B relay element start
157 UV1-C INST Off / On UV1-C relay element start
158 UV2-A INST Off / On UV2-A relay element start
159 UV2-B INST Off / On UV2-B relay element start
160 UV2-C INST Off / On UV2-C relay element start
161 OV1-AB INST Off / On OV1-AB relay element start
162 OV1-BC INST Off / On OV1-BC relay element start
163 OV1-CA INST Off / On OV1-CA relay element start
164 OV2-AB INST Off / On OV2-AB relay element start
165 OV2-BC INST Off / On OV2-BC relay element start
166 OV2-CA INST Off / On OV2-CA relay element start
167 UV1-AB INST Off / On UV1-AB relay element start
168 UV1-BC INST Off / On UV1-BC relay element start
169 UV1-CA INST Off / On UV1-CA relay element start
170 UV2-AB INST Off / On UV2-AB relay element start
171 UV2-BC INST Off / On UV2-BC relay element start
172 UV2-CA INST Off / On UV2-CA relay element start
173 OV1 INST Off / On OV1 relay element start
174 OV2 INST Off / On OV2 relay element start
175 UV1 INST Off / On UV1 relay element start
176 UV2 INST Off / On UV2 relay element start
177 ZPS1 INST Off / On ZPS1 relay element start
178 ZPS2 INST Off / On ZPS2 relay element start
 144 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
No. LCD indication Contents No.

179 NPS1 INST Off / On NPS1 relay element start
180 NPS2 INST Off / On NPS2 relay element start
181 FREQ1 trip Off / On FREQ1 relay element operating
185 FREQ1 block Off / On BI command of FREQ1 protection scheme block
189 Local Off / On CB Control hierarchy Local state
190 Remote Off / On CB Control hierarchy Remote state
191 CB OPC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Open
192 CB CLC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Close
193 CB OPC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Open
194 CB CLC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Close
195 CB OPC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Open
196 CB CLC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Close
197 LOCK_BI Off / On BI command of Interlock
198 LOCK_COMM Off / On Communication command of Interlock
199 CB OPOUT Off / On CB Open Output
200 CB CLOUT Off / On CB Close Output
201 V0 ALM Off / On Zero phase input circuit alarm
202 V2 ALM Off / On VT circuit supervision alarm
203 BO1 operate Off / On Binary output1 operating
211 GEN.pick-up Off / On General start / pick-up command
 145 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix C
Binary Output Default Setting List
 146 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Relay BO Terminal Signal Contents Setting

Model No. No. Name
Signal No. Logic Reset
(OR:0, (Inst:0, Del:1
AND:1) Latch:2)
TB2:
GRE130 BO1 1-2 NON Off (Link to CB Close SW) 0 0 1
-410 BO2 3–4 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
(Link to CB Open SW)
BO3 5-6 GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General) 150 0 1
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
R.F. 9 - 10 Relay fail
TB2:
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
R.F. 9 - 10 Relay fail
TB3:
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
R.F. 9 – 10 Relay fail
TB1
BO5 1-2 NON Off 0 0 1
BO6 3-4 NON Off 0 0 1
BO7 5-6 NON Off 0 0 1
BO8 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
 147 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix D
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
 148 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
MAIN MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Control
Test
/1 Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/2 Fault /3 Fault /4 Fault #1

View record 16/Jul/2010
Clear #1 16/Jul/2010
18:13:57.031
Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Event /3 Event
View record
Clear 16/Jul/2010
Ext. trip A On
Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Disturbance /3 Disturbance
View record
Clear #1 16/Jul/2010
Refer to Section
18:13:57.401
4.2.3.3.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
a-1 b-1
 149 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
/2 Counter /3 Counter
View counter Trips *****
Clear Trips TripsA *****
Clear Trips A TripsB *****
Clear Trips B TripsC *****
Clear Trips C
Clear Trips?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
 150 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1
/1 Status /2 Metering
Metering Va **.** kV
Binary I/O
Relay element /2 Binary I/O
Time sync. IP [0000 00 ]
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast /2 Ry element
AN OV1-4[0000 ]
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 16/Jul/2010
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Refer to Section 4.2.5
/2 Version
GRE130-411A-10
Relay type
-10
Software
■Software
/2 Description
GS1EM1-03-*
Plant name
■PLC data
Description
/3 Addr.
/2 Comms
Addr. *
Addr.
Switch /3 Switch
a-1, b-1
 151 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
/2 Record /3 Event
Event BI1 comm. 3
Disturbance N/O/R/B
Counter :
/3 Disturbance /4 Time/starter
Time/Starter Time1 2.0s
Scheme sw
Binary sig. /4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1 51
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/3 Metering TCALM 10000
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
Time zone /3 Time sync.
/2 Act. gp. =*
/3 Time zone.
Common
Group1
Group2
/3 Common
APPL
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
/4 Parameter ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Line name ∗∗∗∗∗∗
VT ratio
/5 VT ratio
VTS 100
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
 152 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Trip /5 Scheme sw /6 Application

Scheme sw Application
Prot.element OV prot.
/6 OV prot.
UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot. /6 UV prot.
FRQ prot.
/6 ZPS prot.
/6 NPS prot.
/6 FRQ prot.
/5 Prot.element /6 OV prot.
OV prot. OV1 10.0V
UV prot.
/6 UV prot.
ZPS prot.
UV1 10.0V
NPS prot.
/3 Group2 FRQ prot. /6 ZPS prot.
Parameter ZPS1 10.0V
/6 NPS prot.
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI STATUS NPS1 10.0V
BI STATUS
BI1 /6 FRQ prot.
BI2 /3 BI1 FRQ1 10.0Hz
BI3 Timers
BI4 /4 Timers
Functions
BI5 BI1PUD 0.00s
BI6
Alarm1 Text /4 Functions
Alarm2 Text /3 BI6
Alarm3 Text Timers
Alarm4 Text Functions
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Alarm∗ Text
a-1 b-1
 153 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-1
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, DL
0, 0, 0, 0
BO4 OR , Lat
141, 1, 2, 3
/2 LED
LED /3 LED
Virtual LED
/2 Control
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1
IND1 BIT1 I,O
/2 Frequency IND2
/4 IND2
/1 Set.(change) BIT1 I,O
Password
Description : Password trap
Comms Set.(change)
Record Password [_ ]
Status 1234567890←
Protection
Binary I/P : Confirmation trap
Binary O/P Change settings?

ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
LED
Control
Frequency
Set.(change) Set.(change) Refer to Section

Input [_ ] Retype [_ ] 4.2.6.2.
1234567890← 1234567890←
/2 Description _
Plant name ABCDEFG
Description
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.3. ABCDEFG
/2 Comms /3 Addr.
Addr. Addr
Switch
Refer to Section
/3 Switch
4.2.6.4. RS485
a-1 b-2
 154 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2
/2 Record /3 Event
Event BI1 comm.
Disturbance BI1 comm. 3 _
Counter N/O/R/B
:
/4 Time/starter
Refer to Section :
4.2.6.5.
/3 Disturbance /4 Scheme sw
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig. /4 Binary sig.
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status /3 Metering
Metering Display
Time sync.
Time zone /3 Time sync.
Refer to Section Time sync.
4.2.6.6.
/3 Time zone
/2 Protection GMT _
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Refer to Section
Copy gp. 4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
/4 Common
APPL
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
 155 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
/5 Parameter _
Line name ABCDEFG
VT ratio
/6 VT ratio
VTS
/5 Trip /6 Scheme sw /7 Application

Scheme sw Application
Prot.element OV prot.
/7 OV prot.
UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot. /7 UV prot.
FRQ prot.
/7 ZPS prot.
/7 NPS prot.
/7 FRQ prot.
/6 Prot.element /7 OV prot.
OV prot.
UV prot.
/7 UV prot.
ZPS prot.
NPS prot.
FRQ prot. /7 ZPS prot.
/7 NPS prot.
/4 Group2
Parameter
/7 FRQ prot.
a-1, b-2 c-2
 156 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2 c-2
/3 Copy A to B
A _
B _
/3 BI Status
/2 Binary I/P BITHR1
BI Status
BI1 /3 BI1 /4 Timers
BI2 Timers
BI3 Functions
BI4 /4 Functions
BI5 /3 BI6
BI6 Timers
Alarm1 Text Functions
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Alarm4 Text ABCDEFG
Refer to Section Alarm∗ Text
4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P /3 BO1 /4 Logic/Reset
BO1 Logic/Reset
BO2 Functions
BO3 /4 Functions
BO4 /3 BO4
Refer to Section Logic/Reset
4.2.6.9. Functions
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.
/3 LED /4 LED1 /5 Logic/Reset

LED1 Logic/Reset
LED2 Functions
LED3 LED Color /5 Functions
LED4
LED5 /4 LED6
LED6 Logic/Reset /5 LED Color
CB CLOSED Functions
LED Color
/4 CB CLOSED /5 LED Color

a-1 b-2 c-3 LED Color
 157 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
a-1 b-2 c-3
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1 /5 Reset

IND1 Reset
IND2 Functions
/5 Functions
/4 IND2
/2 Control Reset
Functions
/2 Frequency : Password trap
Control
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
/1 Control Control Control

Password(Ctrl) Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
Local/Remote 1234567890← 1234567890←
CB OPEN/CLOSE Refer to Section
4.2.7.2.
Refer to Section 4.2.7
/1 Test Test Test

Password(Test) Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
Switch 1234567890← 1234567890←
Binary O/P Refer to Section
Refer to Section 4.2.8. 4.2.8.2. : Password trap
Test
/2 Switch
Password [_ ]
A.M.F. 1 _ 1234567890←
Off/On
UVTST 0
Off/S0/S3
/2 Binary O/P Operate?

ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1 0 _
Disable/Enable
BO4 0
Disable/Enable
 158 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix E
Case Outline
 159 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Case Outline
 160 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Case Outline for model 412
 161 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix F
Typical External Connection
 162 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A OUTPUT CONACTS
B SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
C BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

Control
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
BO3 GENERAL ALARM Power
P
BO4 OFF
Controled
CB
GRE130-410A TB2
APPL ； 1PP CB CLOSE CB CLOSE BO1
TB1
SW
1
2
1 CB OPEN CB OPEN/TRIP BO2
2 Vph SW
3
3 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 Ve AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
10 N.C. Relay fail BO5
N 11 9
12 GND POWER 10 Relay fail
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
14 - DEFAULT BI1-2; Off 12 N
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
Available for 33.6/77/154V
FG TCS 13
(CB CLOSED) 14
AUXILIARY Threshold BI2
FRONT PANEL TCS 15
(CB OPEN) 16 N
USB Type B 17
N.C. 18
19
20
Rear PANEL 22 A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 1PP setting
 163 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A OUTPUT CONACTS
C BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

Control
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
BO4 OFF
Controled
CB
GRE130-411A TB2
APPL ； 1PN CB CLOSE CB CLOSE BO1
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Vph SW
3
3 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 Ve AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
FRONT PANEL Available for 15
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
USB Type B
(CB CLOSED) AUXILIARY 17
(CB OPEN) AUXILIARY 18
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 411A 1PN setting
 164 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A OUTPUT CONACTS
C BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

Control
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
BO4 OFF
Controled
CB
GRE130-410A TB2
TB1 2PZ SW
1
2
2 Vab SW
3
3 Vbc 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 Ve AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
FG TCS 13
(CB CLOSED) 14
FRONT PANEL TCS 15
(CB OPEN) 16 N
USB Type B 17
N.C.
18
19
20
Rear PANEL 22 A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 2PP ( 2PZ ) setting
 165 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A OUTPUT CONACTS
C BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

Control
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
BO4 OFF
Controled
CB
GRE130-411A TB2
APPL ； 3PN CB CLOSE CB CLOSE BO1
TB1 　　　　3PV
SW
1
2
2 Va SW
3
3 Vb 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 Vc 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 Ve AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
USB Type B
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 COM
A+
B- 24 B-
Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 3PN ( 3PV ) setting
 166 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A OUTPUT CONACTS
C BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)

Control
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
BO4 OFF
Controled
CB
GRE130-410A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Vab SW
3
3 Vbc 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 Vca 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 Ve AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
FG TCS 13
(CB CLOSED) 14
FRONT PANEL TCS 15
(CB OPEN) 16 N
USB Type B 17
N.C.
18
19
20
Rear PANEL 22 A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 COM
A+
B- 24 B-
 167 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A
B
C Control
Power
P
Controled
CB
GRE130-412A TB3
TB2
SW
1
2
2 Vab SW
3
3 Vbc 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 Vca 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 Ve AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
10 N.C. Relay fail R.F.
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS 16
Threshold
77/154V
USB Type B
AUXILIARY 19
Rear PANEL AUXILIARY 20
22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
RJ45
COM 21
A+ 23 COM
A+
N.C. B- 24 B-
Control
TB1 Power
AUXILIARY BO5
1
2
AUXILIARY BO6
OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT) Optional Communication 3
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)
Port *** 4
AUXILIARY BO7
BO2 GENERAL TRIP
BO3 GENERAL ALARM *
5
BO4 OFF
100BASE-TX 6
　1port / 2port AUXILIARY BO8
BO5 OFF
BO6 OFF 7 *
BO7 OFF 8
BO8 OFF 9
N.C. 10
100BASE-FX
　1port / 2port 11
12
*BO3, 4, 7 and 8 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

 168 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix G
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
 169 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency AC voltage
Supply voltage Active setting group
Password
Setting
Control
Test
2. Line parameter
VT ratio PVT: RVT:
3. Contacts setting
TB2 (For model type 412, the terminal block number is TB3 )
BO1 Terminal 1-2
BO2 Terminal 3-4
BO3 Terminal 5-6
BO4 Terminal 7-8
BI1 Terminal 13-14

BI2 Terminal 15-16
BI3 Terminal 17-22
BI4 Terminal 18-22
BI5 Terminal 19-22
BI6 Terminal 20-22
TB1 (Only for model type 412)

BO5 Terminal 1-2
BO6 Terminal 3-4
BO7 Terminal 5-6
BO8 Terminal 7-8
 170 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. Relay setting sheet
Menu Name Range Contents Default

Password for None
Password(Set) 0000 – 9999
Setting change (0000)
None
Password Password(Ctrl) 0000 – 9999 Password for Control
(0000)
None
Password(Test) 0000 – 9999 Password for Test
(0000)
Plant name Specified by user Plant name －
Description
Description ditto Memorandum for user －
Modbus 1 - 247 Relay ID No.for Modbus 1
IEC 0 - 254 Relay ID No.for IEC 1
RS485BR 9.6 / 19.2 Baud rate for Modbus 19.2
PORTTYPE RS485-1 Switch for communications RS485-1(0)
Ether P Off / IEC61850 Switch for communications Off(0)
RS485P Off/MOD/IEC103 Switch for communications MOD(1)
IECNFI 1.2 / 2.4 Switch for communications 2.4(1)
IECBLK Normal/Blocked Switch for communications Normal(0)
IECB1 0 - 361 IEC user specified signal 1 1
IECGT 0-8 IEC General Trip 2
IECAT 0-8 IEC Trip A phase 2
IECBT 0-8 IEC Trip B phase 2
IECCT 0-8 IEC Trip C phase 2
IECE1 0 - 361 IEC user event 1 0
Communi
-cation
IECI1 0 - 255 IEC user INF 1 0
IECGI1 No / Yes IEC event type setting 1 No(0)
 171 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

61850BLK Normal / Blocked IEC61850 Block setting Normal(0)
Off / On IEC61850
61850AUT Off(0)
Auto negotiation setting
TSTMOD Off / On IEC61850 Test mode Off(0)
PINGCHK Off / On Ping check Off(0)
IP1-1 0 – 254 IP address 1 of ETH 1 192
SM1-1 0 – 255 Subnet mask 1 of ETH 1 255
Communi
GW1-1 0 – 254 Default gateway of ETH1 192
-cation
SI1-1 0 – 254 SNTP server address 1 0
PG1-1 0 – 254 Ping check add1 of ETH1 0
SMODE Off / On SNTP mode 0(Off)
DEADT 1 – 32400 s Keep-arrive timeout 7200
1 – 60 s GOOSE receive check
GOINT 60
interval
None/Operate/ Both(3)
BI1 comm. BI1 command trigger
Reset/Both
Reset/Both
Event Reset/Both
Record None/Operate/ Both(3)
Reset/Both
Reset/Both
Reset/Both
Recording period 3.0
Time1 0.1 – 4.9 s
before fault
Recording period 2.0
Time2 0.1 – 4.9 s
after fault
Disturbance OV 10.0 – 200.0 V OV element for disturbance
Record UV 1.0 – 130.0 V UV element for disturbance
NPS 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS element for disturbance
ZPS 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS element for disturbance
Trip Off / On Disturbance trigger On
 172 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

BI Off / On Disturbance trigger On
OV Off / On Disturbance trigger On
UV Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
NPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
ZPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
SIG1 0 – 361 51
SIG2 0 – 361 52
SIG3 0 – 361 53
SIG4 0 – 361 63
SIG5 0 – 361 102
SIG6 0 – 361 103
SIG7 0 – 361 104
SIG8 0 – 361 117
Disturbance
SIG9 0 – 361 141
Record Disturbance Trigger
SIG10 0 – 361 142
SIG11 0 – 361 143
SIG12 0 – 361 144
SIG13 0 – 361 145
SIG14 0 – 361 0
SIG15 0 – 361 0
SIG16…30 0 – 361 0
SIG31 0 – 361 0
SIG32 0 – 361 0
Trip Circuit Off
TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-On
Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker State Off
CBSMEN Off / On
Counter Monitoring Alarm Enable
TCAEN Off / On Trip Count Alarm Enable Off
Trip Count Alarm 10000
TCALM 1 – 10000
Threshold
Display Pri / Sec Metering Pri
Status Off / BI / Modbus Off
Time sync. Time synch setting
/ 103 / SNTP
BITHR1 48 / 110 /220 BI1,BI2 Threshold 110
BITHR2 110 / 220 BI3-BI6 Threshold 110
BI1PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI1DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Drop-off delay 0.00
BI1SNS Norm / Inv BI1 Trigger Norm
BI1SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI1 Settings Group Off
OV1BLK Off / On OV1 Block Off
OV2BLK Off / On OV2 Block Off
Binary OV3BLK Off / On OV3 Block Off
Input BI1 UV1BLK Off / On UV1 Block Off
UV2BLK Off / On UV2 Block Off
UV3BLK Off / On UV3 Block Off
ZP1BLK Off / On ZPS1 Block Off
ZP2BLK Off / On ZPS2 Block Off
NP1BLK Off / On NPS1 Block Off
NP2BLK Off / On NPS2 Block Off
TCFALM Off / On Trip Circuit Fail Alarm Off
 173 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CBOPN Off / On Circuit Breaker Open Off
CBCLS Off / On Circuit Breaker Closed Off
EXT3PH Off / On External Trip 3 Phase Off
EXTAPH Off / On External Trip A Phase Off
EXTBPH Off / On External Trip B Phase Off
EXTCPH Off / On External Trip C Phase Off
RMTRST Off / On Remote Reset Off
SYNCLK Off / On Synchronize clock Off
STORCD Off / On Store Disturbance Record Off
Alarm1 Off / On Alarm screen 1 Off
BI1 Alarm2 Off / On Alarm screen 2 Off
RMTOPN Off / On Remote CB Open Control Off
RMTCLS Off / On Remote CB Close Control Off
CNTLCK Off / On Interlock input Off
FRQ1BLK Off / On FRQ1 Block Off
BI2 BI2SNS Norm / Inv BI2 Trigger Norm
Binary BI2SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI2 Settings Group Off
Input The following items are same as BI1
The following items are same as BI1
BI4DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Drop-off Delay 0.00
Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR
Reset Ins / DI / Dw / Lat Reset Operation DI
Binary BO1 In #1 0 – 361 Functions 141
Output In #2 0 – 361 Functions 0
In #3 0 – 361 Functions 0
 174 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

BO1 In #4 0 – 361 Functions 0
TBO 0.00 – 10.00 s Delay / Pulse width 0.20
BO2 Same as BO1
Binary BO3 Same as BO1
Output BO4 Same as BO1
BO5 Same as BO1 (for model 412)
Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR
Reset Inst / Latch Reset Operation Inst
LED1 In #2 0 – 361 Functions 0
Color R/G/Y LED Color R
LED2 Same as LED1
LED3 Same as LED1
LED4 Same as LED1
LED5 Same as LED1
Confi-
LED6 Same as LED1
gurable
CB CLOSED Color R/G/Y CB CLOSED LED Color R
LED
IND1 Reset Inst / Latch IND1 Reset operation Inst
IND2 Reset Inst / Latch IND2 Reset operation Inst
BIT1 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0
IND1
IND2 Same as IND1
Active gp. 1-2 Active setting group 1
ALARM LED lighting
AOLED Off / On On
control at alarm output
Active
Control Disable / Enable Control Enable Disable
group /
Interlock Disable / Enable Interlock Enable Disable
Common
Control Hierarchy --
Control Hierarchy Local / Remote
(if Control = Enable) (Local)
Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Frequency 50Hz
 175 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Line name Specified by user Line name --
PVT 1 – 20000 VT ratio of Phase VT 100
RVT 1 – 20000 VT ratio of Earth Fault CT 100
ALM&
SVCNT ALM&BLK/ALM AC input imbalance
BLK
OV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV1 Enable Off
OV OV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV2 Enable Off
OV3EN Off / On OV3 Enable Off
UV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV1 Enable DT
UV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV2 Enable Off
UV
UV3EN Off / On UV3 Enable Off
VBKEN Off / On UV Block Enable Off
ZPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS1 Enable DT
ZPS
ZPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS2 Enable Off
NPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS1 Enable Off
NPS
NPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS2 Enable Off
Off/O/U/B/ B
FT1 FRQ1 Enable
OO/UU
DFT1 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ1 Enable Both
Logic1 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ1 logic L1
Off/O/U/B/ B
FT2 FRQ2 Enable
OO/UU
FRQ
Off/O/U/B/ B
FT3 FRQ3 Enable
OO/UU
Protection
Off/O/U/B/ B
FT4 FRQ4 Enable
OO/UU
OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V OV1 Threshold 120.0 V
OV1 Time multiplier 10.00
TOV1 0.05 – 100.00
(if OV1EN = IDMT)
OV1 Definite time 0.10 s
TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if OV1EN = DT)
TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
OV1DPR 10 – 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95%
OV OV2 Time multiplier 10.00
TOV2 0.05 – 100.00
(if OV2EN = IDMT)
OV2 Definite time 0.10 s
TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if OV2EN = DT)
TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s OV3 Definite time 0.10 s
OV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
 176 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

OV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
OV1-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if OV1EN = C) 0.000
OV OV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
OV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
OV2-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if OV2EN = C) 0.000
UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V UV1 Threshold 60.0 V
UV1 Time multiplier 10.00
TUV1 0.05 – 100.00
(if UV1EN = IDMT)
UV1 Definite time 0.10 s
TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if UV1EN = DT)
TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
UV2 Time multiplier 10.00
TUV2 0.05 – 100.00
(if UV2EN = IDMT)
UV2 Definite time 0.10 s
TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s
UV (if UV2EN = DT)
TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s UV3 Definite time 0.10 s
VBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V UV Blocking 10.0 V
UV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
UV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
UV1-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if UV1EN = C) 0.000
UV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
UV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
UV2-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if UV2EN = C) 0.000
ZPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS1 Threshold 20.0 V
Protection ZPS1 Time multiplier 10.00
TZPS1 0.05 – 100.00
(if ZPS1EN = IDMT)
ZPS1 Definite time 0.00 s
TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if ZPS1EN = DT)
TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
ZPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS2 Threshold 40.0 V
ZPS2 Time multiplier 10.00
TZPS2 0.05 – 100.00
(if ZPS2EN = IDMT)
ZPS ZPS2 Definite time 0.00 s
TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if ZPS2EN = DT)
TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
ZPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
ZPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
ZPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if ZPS1EN = C) 0.000
ZPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
ZPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
ZPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if ZPS2EN = C) 0.000
NPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS1 Threshold 20.0 V
NPS1 Time multiplier 10.00
TNPS1 0.05 – 100.00
(if NPS1EN = IDMT)
NPS NPS1 Definite time 0.00 s
TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if NPS1EN = DT)
TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s NPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s
 177 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS2 Threshold 40.0 V
NPS2 Time multiplier 10.00
TNPS2 0.05 – 100.00
(if NPS2EN = IDMT)
NPS2 Definite time 0.00 s
TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if NPS2EN = DT)
TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s NPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s
NPS NPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
NPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
NPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if NPS1EN = C) 0.000
NPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00
NPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. 1.00
NPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000 (if NPS2EN = C) 0.000
45.00 – 55.00 Hz Over frequency stage 1 51.00 Hz
F11
54.00 – 66.00 Hz threshold 61.00 Hz
TF11 0.00 – 100.00 s OF1 time delay 1.00 s
Protection 45.00 – 55.00 Hz Under frequency stage1 49.00 Hz
F12
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 59.00 Hz
TF12 0.00 – 100.00 s UF1 time delay 1.00 s
DF1 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage1 0.5 Hz/s
F21
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 61.00 Hz
45.00 – 55.00 Hz Under frequency stage2 49.00 Hz
F22
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 59.00 Hz
FRQ 45.00 – 55.00 Hz Over frequency stage 3 51.00 Hz
F31
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 61.00 Hz
F32
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 59.00 Hz
F41
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 61.00 Hz
F42
54.00 – 66.00 Hz Threshold 59.00 Hz
FVBLK 40 – 100 V Under voltage block 40 V
A.M.F. Off / On Automatic monitoring Off
UVTEST Off / On Under voltage test Off
Test
IECTST Off / On IEC103 test mode Off
 178 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix H
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test
4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
 179 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
Power supply
Wiring
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

Binary input circuit
Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit check
 180 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. Function test
4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

OV1
OV2
OV3
UV1
UV2
UV3
ZPS1
ZPS2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time
OV1 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
OV2 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
UV1 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
UV2 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
ZPS1 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
ZPS2 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
 181 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test

(1) Operating value test
Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

NPS1
NPS2
(2) Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

NPS1 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
NPS2 × Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
× Voltage setting
4.3 Frequency elements test
Element Frequency setting Measured frequency

FRQ1
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
Scheme Results
On load check
Tripping circuit
 182 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix I
Return Repair Form
 183 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please complete this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION together with the
GRE130 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRE130 Model:

(Example: Type: GRE130 Model: 411A )
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1. Reason for returning the relay

 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation required
 others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB stick or CD rom, or fill
in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
 184 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / /
/ : : .
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2012 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Van: V
Vbn: V
Vcn: V
Vab: V
Vbc: V
Vca : V
Vph: V
V0: V
V1: V
V2: V
f: Hz
Fault values
Van: V
Vbn: V
Vcn: V
Vab: V
Vbc: V
Vca : V
Vph: V
V0: V
V1: V
V2: V
f: Hz
 185 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4. Describe the details of the incident:
5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /
(Example: 10/Dec/2012)
6. Give any comments about the GRE130, including any relevant documents:
 186 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 187 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix J
Technical Data
 188 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC voltage Vn: 63.5V / 110V
Frequency: 50/60Hz
Power supply: 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 88–264Vac)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12%
Power supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V
Binary input circuit DC voltage: For alarm indication
110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
For trip circuit supervision
Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)
≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)
≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)
≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)
Overload Ratings
AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous
Burden
AC phase voltage inputs: ≤ 0.1 VA (at rated voltage)
Power supply: ≤ 10W (quiescent), ≤ 15W (maximum)
Binary input circuit: ≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Overvoltage Protection (59)
1st, 2nd, 3rd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type: DTL, IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps
DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
DO/PU ratio 10 - 98% in 1% steps
Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage Protection (27)
1st, 2nd, 3rd Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type: DTL, IDMTL
Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Zero Sequence Overvoltage (ZPS) Protection (59N)
st nd
1 , 2 ZPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
st
Delay type (1 threshold only): DTL, IDMTL
Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
 189 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (NPS) Protection (47)

1st, 2nd NPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL
st
Reset Delay (1 threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Frequency Protection (81U/O)
1st – 4th Under frequency 45.00 – 50.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)
54.00 – 60.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)
1st – 4th Under frequency 50.00 – 55.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz)
60.00 – 66.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)
Frequency rate-of-change +0.1 to +9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
−0.1 to −9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
st th
Timer for stage 1 - 4 0.00 – 100.00 s in 0.01 s steps
Frequency UV Block 40 – 100V in 1V steps
Accuracy
IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up: 100% of setting ± 5%
All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 5%
Overvoltage PU/DO ratio: approx, 95% (settable for phase overvoltage)
IDMTL Undervoltage Pick-up: 95% of setting ± 5%
All Other Undervoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 5%
Undervoltage PU/DO ratio: approx, 105%
Over Frequency Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 0.05Hz (setting: ≥ rated frequency - 5.00Hz)
Under Frequency Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 0.05Hz (setting: ≤ rated frequency + 5.00Hz)
Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 0.07Hz/s (setting: ≤ 5.00Hz/s)
Inverse Operate Time: IEC60255-127, ±5% or 100ms
(OV; 1.2 ≤ G/Gs ≤ GD/Gs , UV; 0 ≤ G/Gs ≤ 1) GD = 300V
OV Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
UV Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≤ 80% of setting)
ZPS Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
NPS Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 50ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
Under/Over Frequency Operate Time DTL + 80-200ms (rated frequency: 50Hz)
DTL + 70-170ms (rated frequency: 60Hz)
Frequency rate-of-change Operate Time
190-300ms (rated frequency: 50Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
160-250ms (rated frequency: 60Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)
Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts
Front Communication port - local PC (USB2.0)
Connector type: USB-Type B
Cable length: 5m (max.)
Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type: Twisted pair
Cable length: 1200m (max.)
 190 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Connector: Screw terminals

Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate: 19.2 kbps
Rear Communication port (Ethernet)
100BASE-TX RJ-45 connector

100BASE-FX SC connector
Binary Inputs
Operating voltage For signal detection
Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating
Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating
Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating
Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating
For trip circuit supervision
≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating
≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating
≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating
≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating
Binary Outputs
Number 4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)
Ratings Make and carry: 5A continuously
model 410 and 411; BO#1 and #2 Make and carry: 5A continuously
model 412: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6 Contact : 0.4A 250Vdc, 8A 380Vac, 3040VA, 150W
Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=40ms)
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
other BOs
Make and carry: 4A continuously
Contact: 0.2A 110Vdc, 8A 250Vac, 2000VA, 240W
Durability: Loaded contact: ≥1,000 operations
Unloaded contact: ≥10,000 operations
Pickup time: Less than 15ms
Reset time: Less than 10ms
Mechanical design
Weight 1.5kg for model 410A and 411A
1.8kg for model 412A
Width 149mm for model 410A and 411A
223mm for model 412A
Height 177mm
Depth 168mm
Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Installation Flush mounting with attachment kits
 191 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test Standards Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -20°C to +60°C.
IEC 60068-2-30 Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
IEEE C37.90.0 2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of
5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit (PSU), BI and BO
circuits; between terminals and earth, and between
independent circuits
3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth
3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts
1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals
and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.
Disturbance / Damped IEC 61000-4-12 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Oscillatory Wave IEEE C37.90.1
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-3 and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,
Disturbance 900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 Class A, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4,
IEEE C37.90.1
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5, 1.2/50µs surge in common/differential modes:
IEC 61000-4-5 HV, PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 Class A, 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
 192 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Test Standards Details

Conducted and IEC 60255-25, Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC 61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic
EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC
Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard
EN 60255-27.
 193 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix K
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 194 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
The symbols used in the scheme logic and their respective meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to external equipment
Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A B C Output
A
1 1 1 1
B & Output Other cases 0
C
A
A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0
A
A B C Output
B & Output 1 0 0 1
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A
A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
 195 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output 0 1
1 0
Timer
t 0
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY

Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output 1 0 1
R 0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output
1 ON 1
ON
Other cases 0
Switch Output
+ Output ON 1
ON OFF 0
 196 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix L
Modbus: Interoperability
 197 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Modbus: Interoperability
1. Physical and Data Link Layer
- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface
- RTU mode only
- Coding System:
8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)
Even parity
- Address setting range: 1-247
- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200
2. Application Layer
(1) Modbus response format
FC Description Supplementary explanation

01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag
02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.
03 Read Holding Registers -
04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs
05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization
06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number
07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status
08 Diagnostic -
16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc.
17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID
43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information
For FC=01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "MODBUS
Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".
For other FCs, the response format is as following:
07 Read Exception status

Response Data
Output Data (1byte)
bit Description
0 IN SERVICE (LED)
1 TRIP (LED)
2 ALARM (LED)
3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
4 CB CLOSED (LED)
5 CB OPEN (LED)
6 Relay fail output (BO)
7 <Reserved>
08 Diagnostic
Response Data
 198 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
SC Response Data Field Description

00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data
01 <not supported>
02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register
bit0 IN SERVICE (LED)
bit1 TRIP (LED)
bit2 ALARM (LED)
bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
bit4 <Reserved>
bit5 <Reserved>
bit6 <Reserved>
bit7 <Reserved>
bit8 3-phase current balance alarm
bit9 CB contact status alarm
bit10 CB operation number alarm
bit11 <Reserved>
bit12 V0 error alarm
bit13 V2 error alarm
bit14 <Reserved>
bit15 <Reserved>
03- <not supported>
17 Report Slave ID
Response Data
Byte Count (1byte) 18bytes
Slave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID
GRE130-411A-10-10 ASCII
Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service
43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)

Response Data
Param OID
01 Basic device identification
00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name
01 GRE130-411 Product Code
02 A Major Minor Revision
02 Regular device identification
03 <Non> Vendor URL
04 GRE130 Product Name
05 411A-10-10 Model Name
06 Overvoltage Relay User Application Name
07- <Reserved> Reserved
03 Extended device identification
80 <SPACE>
81 GS1EM1-03-A Software version
One specific identification
04 <not supported>
object
 199 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(2) Modbus address map group

Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification
Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)
Remote control (command, interlock), Time
(Read/Write) 0x0400 4
synchronization, Clear command
Discrete Input 0x1000 6 BI
0x1016 5 Relay fail output, BO
(Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)
0x1080 16 Virtual LED
0x1201 － Signal list (see Appendix A for detail)
Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., not
Input Registers 0x2000 40 converted to engineering units)
2-word long
Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc.,
(Read Only) 0x2800 40 converted to engineering units)
2-word long
Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records,
Holding Registers 0x3000 29
write protected
Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200
(Read/Write) 0x3200 72
records, write protected
0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format)
0x3810 30 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long
0x3E82 2 Password for remote control
0x4000 － Setting value (see Appendix H for detail), Read Only
0x8000 Undefined after this address
Discrete Input Single bit Read-Only

Coils Single bit Read-Write
Input Registers 16-bit word Read-Only
Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write
(3)Modbus address map

Address Description Supplementary explanation
Coils
Remote control (R/W)
0200 Remote control enable flag
0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on)
Time synchronization
0403 Call time synchronization task (on)
command
 200 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Discrete Input
BI status (R)
1000 BI1
1001 BI2
1002 BI3 Only for GRE130-411A
BO status (R)
1016 Relay fail output
1017 BO1
1018 BO2
1019 BO3
101A BO4
101B BO5 Only for GRE130-412A
101C BO6 Only for GRE130-412A
101D BO7 Only for GRE130-412A
101E BO8 Only for GRE130-412A
LED lamp status (R)
1040 IN SERVICE
1041 TRIP
1042 ALARM
1043 RELAY FAIL
1044 CB CLOSED
1045 CB OPEN
1046 LOCAL
1047 REMOTE
1048 LED1
1049 LED2
104A LED3
104B LED4
104C LED5
104D LED6
Virtual LED status (R)
1080 IND1 BIT1
1081 IND1 BIT2
1082 IND1 BIT3
1083 IND1 BIT4
1084 IND1 BIT5
1085 IND1 BIT6
1086 IND1 BIT7
1087 IND1 BIT8
1088 IND2 BIT1
1089 IND2 BIT2
 201 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

108A IND2 BIT3
108B IND2 BIT4
108C IND2 BIT5
108D IND2 BIT6
108E IND2 BIT7
108F IND2 BIT8

Signal list (R)
1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix A
1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix A
… Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix A

Input Registers
Analog data (R) Followings are NOT converted to engineering units.
2000 Van / Vab / Vph (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2001 Van / Vab / Vph (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2002 Van / Vab (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2003 Van / Vab (L)
2004 Vbn / Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2005 Vbn / Vbc (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2006 Vbn / Vbc (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2007 Vbn / Vbc (L)
2008 Vcn / Vca (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2009 Vcn / Vca (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
200A Vcn / Vca (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
200B Vcn / Vca (L)
200C V0 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
200D V0 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
200E V0 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
200F V0 (L)
2010 V2 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2011 V2 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2012 V2 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2013 V2 (L)
2014 V1 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV)
2015 V1 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V)
2016 V1 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg)
2017 V1 (L)
2018 <Reserved>
2019 <Reserved>
201A <Reserved>
201B <Reserved>
 202 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

201C <Reserved>
201D <Reserved>
201E <Reserved>
201F <Reserved>
2020 <Reserved>
2021 <Reserved>
2022 <Reserved>
2023 <Reserved>
2024 <Reserved>
2025 <Reserved>
2026 f (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)
2027 f (L)
2028 fmax (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)
2029 fmax (L)
202A fmin (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)
202B fmin (L)
202C df / dt (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)
202D df / dt (L)
202E df / dtx (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)
202F df / dtx (L)
2030 df / dtn (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)
2031 df / dtn (L)
2032 <Reserved>
2033 <Reserved>
2034 <Reserved>
2035 <Reserved>
2036 <Reserved>
2037 <Reserved>

The following are converted to engineering units.
Analog data (R)
(the same as the displayed value)
2800 Van (H)
2801 Van (L)
2802 Van (H)
2803 Van (L)
2804 Vbn (H)
2805 Vbn (L)
2806 Vbn (H)
2807 Vbn (L)
2808 Vcn (H)
2809 Vcn (L)
280A Vcn (H)
280B Vcn (L)
280C Vab (H)
 203 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

280D Vab (L)
280E Vab (H)
280F Vab (L)
2810 Vbc (H)
2811 Vbc (L)
2812 Vbc (H)
2813 Vbc (L)
2814 Vca (H)
2815 Vca (L)
2816 Vca (H)
2817 Vca (L)
2818 Vph (H)
2819 Vph (L)
281A V0 (H)
281B V0 (L)
281C V0 (H)
281D V0 (L)
281E V1 (H)
281F V1 (L)
2820 V1 (H)
2821 V1 (L)
2822 V2 (H)
2823 V2 (L)
2824 V2 (H)
2825 V2 (L)
2826 f (H)
2827 f (L)
2828 fmax (H)
2829 fmax (L)
282A fmin (H)
282B fmin (L)
282C df / dt (H)
282D df / dt (L)
282E df / dtx (H)
282F df / dtx (L)
2830 df / dtn (H)
2831 df / dtn (L)
2832 <Reserved>
2833 <Reserved>
2834 <Reserved>
2835 <Reserved>
2836 <Reserved>
2837 <Reserved>
 204 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Holding Registers
Fault record (R)
3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 4)
Indication of record #1. If no data, all of the following data is
3001 No.1
set to 0.
3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3005 year 0-99(y)
3006 Fault phase
3007 Trip mode
3008 No.2
set to 0.
300A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
300B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
300C year 0-99(y)
300D Fault phase
300E Trip mode
300F No.3
set to 0.
3012 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3013 year 0-99(y)
3014 Fault phase
3015 Trip mode
3016 No.4
set to 0.
3019 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
301A year 0-99(y)
301B Fault phase
301C Trip mode
 205 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time.
3200 records count Number of records saved (max. 200)
3201 set No. (R/W) Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10 records)
3202 No. X Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.
3205 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3206 year 0-99(y)
3207 Event ID See Appendix B
3208 Action 1:on 、2:off、
Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is set to
3209 No.X+1
0.
320A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
320B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
320C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
320D year 0-99(y)
320E Event ID See Appendix B
320F Action 1:on 、2:off
3210 No.X+2
0.
3213 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3214 year 0-99(y)
3216 Action 1:on 、2:off
3217 No.X+3
0.
321A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
321B year 0-99(y)
321C Event ID See Appendix B
321D Action 1:on 、2:off
321E No.X+4
0.
321F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3221 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3222 year 0-99(y)
 206 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3225 No.X+5
0.
3228 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3229 year 0-99(y)
322A Event ID See Appendix B
322B Action 1:on 、2:off
322C No.X+6
0.
322D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
322E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
322F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3230 year 0-99(y)
3233 No.X+7
0.
3236 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3237 year 0-99(y)
323A No.X+8
0.
323B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
323C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
323D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
323E year 0-99(y)
323F Event ID See Appendix B
3241 No.X+9
0.
3244 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3245 year 0-99(y)
 207 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format
3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3803 year 0-99(y)
Counters (R/W)
3810 Trips Phase-A (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3811 Trips Phase-A (L)
3812 Trips Phase-B (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3813 Trips Phase-B (L)
3814 Trips Phase-C (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3815 Trips Phase-C (L)
3816 Trips any phase (H) Can be set to an initial value.
3817 Trips any phase (L)
Password
3E82 Control (H) Password for remote control (in ASCII code)
3E83 Control (L)
Setting values
4000 See the next table for setting values.
7FFF <Reserved>
 208 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
(4) Modbus address for setting values

Setting Group
Address Name Contents
(Menu)
6034 BI1 comm. BI 1 command trigger setting
Event Record
603C Time1 Disturbance record period before fault
6000 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault
6001 OV OC element for disturbance
6002 UV EF element for disturbance
6003 ZPS SEF element for disturbance
6004 NPS NPS element for disturbance
6005 Trip Disturbance trigger
6006 BI Disturbance trigger
6007 OV Disturbance trigger
6008 UV Disturbance trigger
6009 ZPS Disturbance trigger
600A NPS Disturbance trigger
603D FRQ Disturbance trigger
600B SIG1 Disturbance trigger
Disturbance
600C SIG2 Disturbance trigger
Record
600D SIG3 Disturbance trigger
600E SIG4 Disturbance trigger
600F SIG5 Disturbance trigger
6010 SIG6 Disturbance trigger
601A SIG16 Disturbance trigger
601B SIG17 Disturbance trigger
601C SIG18 Disturbance trigger
601D SIG19 Disturbance trigger
601E SIG20 Disturbance trigger
601F SIG21 Disturbance trigger
 209 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Disturbance 6026 SIG28 Disturbance trigger
Record 6027 SIG29 Disturbance trigger
602A SIG32 Disturbance trigger
602B TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
602C CBSMEN Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable
Counter
602D TCAEN Trip Count Alarm Enable
6030 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting
6400 Display Metering
6401 Time sync. Time synchronization method
Status
6402 GMT Time zone (Hours)
640A GMTm Time zone (minutes)
6C00 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2
6C01 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-6
6C02 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay
6C03 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay
6C04 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense
6C05 BI1 BI1SGS Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select
6C06 BI1 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C09 BI1 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C0A BI1 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6C0B BI1 UV3BLK UV3 Block
Binary Input 6C0C BI1 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C0D BI1 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C0E BI1 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C0F BI1 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C10 BI1 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C11 BI1 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C12 BI1 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C13 BI1 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6C14 BI1 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6C15 BI1 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C16 BI1 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C17 BI1 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C18 BI1 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C19 BI1 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C1A BI1 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C1B BI1 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
 210 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C1C BI1 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C1D BI1 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C1E BI1 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C1F BI1 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C20 BI1 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C21 BI1 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6C2A BI2 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C2B BI2 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6C2C BI2 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C2D BI2 UV2BLK UV2 Block
Binary Input
6C2E BI2 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6C2F BI2 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6C30 BI2 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6C31 BI2 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C37 BI2 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6C38 BI2 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C39 BI2 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C3A BI2 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C3B BI2 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C3C BI2 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C3D BI2 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C3E BI2 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6C3F BI2 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C40 BI2 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C41 BI2 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C42 BI2 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
 211 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C4A BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense
6C4B BI3 BI3SGS Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select
6C4C BI3 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6C4D BI3 OV2BLK OV2 Block
6C4E BI3 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6C4F BI3 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6C5A BI3 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
Binary Input 6C5B BI3 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C5C BI3 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C5D BI3 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C5E BI3 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C5F BI3 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C6A BI3 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6C6B BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay
6C6C BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay
6C6D BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense
6C6E BI4 BI4SGS Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select
6C6F BI4 OV1BLK OV1 Block
 212 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C7A BI4 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C7B BI4 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C7C BI4 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6C7D BI4 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6C7E BI4 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6C7F BI4 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6C80 BI4 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C81 BI4 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C82 BI4 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
Binary Input 6C89 BI4 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C8A BI4 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6C8B BI4 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6C8C BI4 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6C8D BI4 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6C8E BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay
6C8F BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay
6C9A BI5 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6C9B BI5 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6C9C BI5 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C9D BI5 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C9E BI5 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C9F BI5 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
 213 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
6CA0 BI5 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6CA1 BI5 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6CA2 BI5 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6CA3 BI5 RMTRST Remote Reset
6CA4 BI5 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6CA5 BI5 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6CA6 BI5 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6CAA BI5 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6CAB BI5 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6CAC BI5 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6CAD BI5 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
6CAE BI5 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block
6CAF BI5 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block
6CB0 BI5 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block
6CB1 BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay
6CB2 BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay
6CB3 BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense
6CB4 BI6 BI6SGS Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select
6CB5 BI6 OV1BLK OV1 Block
6CB6 BI6 OV2BLK OV2 Block
Binary Input 6CB7 BI6 OV3BLK OV3 Block
6CB8 BI6 UV1BLK UV1 Block
6CB9 BI6 UV2BLK UV2 Block
6CBA BI6 UV3BLK UV3 Block
6CBB BI6 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block
6CBC BI6 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block
6CBD BI6 NP1BLK NPS1 Block
6CBE BI6 NP2BLK NPS2 Block
6CBF BI6 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6CC0 BI6 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6CC1 BI6 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6CC2 BI6 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase
6CC3 BI6 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase
6CC4 BI6 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase
6CC5 BI6 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase
6CC6 BI6 RMTRST Remote Reset
6CC7 BI6 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6CC8 BI6 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6CC9 BI6 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6CCA BI6 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6CCB BI6 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
 214 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
6CCC BI6 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6CCD BI6 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6CCE BI6 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
Binary Input 6CCF BI6 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6CD0 BI6 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block
7428 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type
7429 BO1 Reset Reset operation
7400 BO1 In #1 Functions
7450 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width
742A BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type
742B BO2 Reset Reset operation
742C BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type
742D BO3 Reset Reset operation
740A BO3 In #3 Functions
Binary Output
740B BO3 In #4 Functions
742E BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type
742F BO4 Reset Reset operation
740C BO4 In #1 Functions
740D BO4 In #2 Functions
740E BO4 In #3 Functions
740F BO4 In #4 Functions
 215 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
Binary Output 7418 BO7 In #1 Functions
741A BO7 In #3 Functions
741B BO7 In #4 Functions
741C BO8 In #1 Functions
741D BO8 In #2 Functions
741E BO8 In #3 Functions
741F BO8 In #4 Functions
7020 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type
7021 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation
702A LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type
Configurable LED 702B LED7 Reset LED6 Reset operation
7000 LED1 In #1 LED Functions
700A LED3 In #3 LED Functions
700B LED3 In #4 LED Functions
 216 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Group
(Menu)
700C LED4 In #1 LED Functions
700D LED4 In #2 LED Functions
700E LED4 In #3 LED Functions
700F LED4 In #4 LED Functions
7060 LED1 Color LED Color
Configurable LED
7066 CB CLOSED Color LED Color
7050 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation
7051 IND2 Reset IND1 Reset operation
7030 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED
703A IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED
703B IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED
Configurable LED
703C IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED
703D IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED
703E IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED
703F IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED
6800 Active gp. Active setting group
6803 AOLED ALARM LED light control for alarm output
Active group/ 6804 Control Control enable
Common 6805 Interlock Interlock enable
6806 Control Kind Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)
6807 Frequency Frequency
 217 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
4C00 5C00 PVT VT ratio
4C01 5C01 RVT Residual VT ratio
4017 5017 SVCNT AC input imbalance
4000 5000 OV OV1EN OV1 Enable
4003 5003 UV UV1EN UV1 Enable
4006 5006 UV VBLK UVBLOCK Enable
4007 5007 ZPS ZPS1EN ZPS1 Enable
4008 5008 ZPS ZPS2EN ZPS2 Enable
4009 5009 NPS NPS1EN NPS1 Enable
400A 500A NPS NPS2EN NPS2 Enable
400B 500B FRQ1 FT1 FRQ1 Enable / Type
400C 500C FRQ1 DFT1 DFRQ1 Enable / Type
400D 500D FRQ1 Logic1 FRQ1 Logic
400E 500E FRQ2 FT2 FRQ2 Enable / Type
400F 500F FRQ2 DFT2 DFRQ2 Enable / Type
4010 5010 FRQ2 Logic2 FRQ2 Logic
4011 5011 FRQ3 FT3 FRQ3 Enable / Type
Protection 4012 5012 FRQ3 DFT3 DFRQ3 Enable / Type
4014 5014 FRQ4 FT4 FRQ4 Enable / Type
4015 5015 FRQ4 DFT4 DFRQ4 Enable / Type
4800 5800 OV OV1 OV1 Threshold setting
4803 5803 OV TOV1 OV1 Time multiplier setting
4400 5400 OV TOV1 OV1 Definite time setting
4804 5804 OV TOV1R OV1 Definite time reset delay
4805 5805 OV OV1DPR OV1 DO/PU ratio
4816 5816 OV TOV2 OV2 Time multiplier setting
4817 5817 OV TOV2R OV2 Definite time reset delay
4818 5818 OV OV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
4819 5819 OV OV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
481A 581A OV OV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1
481B 581B OV OV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
 218 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
481C 581C OV OV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
481D 581D OV OV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2
4808 5808 UV UV1 UV1 Threshold setting
480B 580B UV TUV1 UV1 Time multiplier setting
4403 5403 UV TUV1 UV1 Definite time setting
480C 580C UV TUV1R UV1 Definite time reset delay
4809 5809 UV UV2 UV2 Threshold setting
481E 581E UV TUV2 UV2 Time multiplier setting
481F 581F UV TUV2R UV2 Definite time reset delay
480A 580A UV UV3 UV2 Threshold setting
480D 580D UV VBLK UV Block Threshold setting
4820 5820 UV UV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
4821 5821 UV UV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
4822 5822 UV UV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1
4823 5823 UV UV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
4824 5824 UV UV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
4825 5825 UV UV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2
Protection
480E 580E ZPS ZPS1 ZPS1 Threshold setting
4810 5810 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Time multiplier setting
4406 5406 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Definite time setting
4811 5811 ZPS TZPS1R ZPS1 Definite time reset delay
480F 580F ZPS ZPS2 ZPS2 Threshold setting
4826 5826 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Time multiplier setting
4407 5407 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Definite time setting
4827 5827 ZPS TZPS2R ZPS2 Definite time reset delay
4828 5828 ZPS ZPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
4829 5829 ZPS ZPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
482A 582A ZPS ZPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1
482B 582B ZPS ZPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
482C 582C ZPS ZPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
482D 582D ZPS ZPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2
4812 5812 NPS NPS1 NPS1 Threshold setting
4814 5814 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Time multiplier setting
4408 5408 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Definite time setting
4815 5815 NPS TNPS1R NPS1 Definite time reset delay
4813 5813 NPS NPS2 NPS2 Threshold setting
482E 582E NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Time multiplier setting
4409 5409 NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Definite time setting
482F 582F NPS TNPS2R NPS2 Definite time reset delay
4830 5830 NPS NPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
4831 5831 NPS NPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
 219 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Setting Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
4832 5832 NPS NPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1
4833 5833 NPS NPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
4834 5834 NPS NPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
4835 5835 NPS NPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2
4836 5836 FRQ F11 F11 Threshold setting
440A 540A FRQ TF11 F11 Time delay setting
440B 540B FRQ TF12 F12 Time delay setting
4838 5838 FRQ DF1 DFRQ1 Threshold setting
440C 540C FRQ TF21 F21 Time delay setting
Protection
483A 583A FRQ F22 F22 Threshold setting
440D 540D FRQ TF22 F22 Time delay setting
483B 583B FRQ DF2 DFRQ2 Threshold setting
483C 583C FRQ F31 F31 Threshold setting
440E 540E FRQ TF31 F31 Time delay setting
483D 583D FRQ F32 F32 Threshold setting
440F 540F FRQ TF32 F32 Time delay setting
483E 583E FRQ DF3 DFRQ3 Threshold setting
483F 583F FRQ F41 F41 Threshold setting
4410 5410 FRQ TF41 F41 Time delay setting
4411 5411 FRQ TF42 F42 Time delay setting
4841 5841 FRQ DF4 DFRQ4 Threshold setting
4842 5842 FRQ FVBLK FRQ Block threshold setting
3. CB remote control
To control the CB at remote site with the Modbus communication, do the following.
･Operation item
- Remote control (CB on / off)
- Change of interlock position
- LED reset
・Operating procedure
To control the CB at remote site with Modbus communication is require the following three steps.
- Pass word authentication
- Enable flag setting for remote control
- Remote control
CAUTION
To control the CB at remote site, set the control hierarchy setting of relay to “Remote”.
 220 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
A. Pass word authentication

To authenticate the password, enter the password for control function to the address of “3E82” . The
password is the same as that of control function.
The password retention is 1 minute.
If no password is set, please enter “0000” as password.
The sending messages transmitted with ASCII code.

Ex. “0000” -> “303030303”
Message example (Relay address:01, Password:0000, need CRC frame)

to relay 01103E8200020430303030
from relay 01103E820002
B. Enable flag setting for remote control

To enable the remote control, turn on the address of “0200 : Remote control enable flag”.
When the operation completed or time-out occurs, the flag is reset.
Flag state can be checked in the command of “FC=01 Read Coils”.
Message example
to relay 02050200FF00
from relay 02050200FF00
C. Remote control
To control the CB at remote site, turn on or off the address of “0400: Remote control
command”, ”0401: Remote interlock command” or “0402: Remote reset command”.
The “On” operation command is “FF00”. The “Off” operation command is “0000”.
The operation reply is checked by the “BO” or “LED” signals according to the relay settings.
Message example (Relay address:01、CB on, need CRC frame)

to relay 01050400FF00
from relay 01050400FF00
Message example (Relay address:01、CB off, need CRC frame)

to relay 010504000000
from relay 010504000000
 221 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
 222 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of devices, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (Application Service Data Unit)
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using the Function type (FUN) / Information
numbers (INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. 8 wide-use events are provided.
3.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
3.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 and 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values is 2 seconds.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either
1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value. Either 1.2 or 2.4 can be selected by the
“IECNFV” and “IECNFf” settings.
3.4 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the table below. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
3.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in
the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.
This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
3.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
 223 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
4. List of Information
List of Information
Typ
INF Description Contents GI COT FUN
e ID
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 215
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 215
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 215
5 Power On Relay power on. Not supported
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set active, if
16 Auto-recloser active Not supported
impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available, this item is set
17 Teleprotection active Not supported
to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If not, set to 1, 7, 9, 12,
18 Protection active GI 1 215
inactive. 20
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 7, 11, 12, 20 215
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control system.

20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 9, 11 215
IECBLK: "Blocked" setting.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to control
21 Test mode GI 1 9 215.
system. IECTST: "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the event is sent
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
to control system.
7, 9, 11, 12,
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 215
20
7, 9, 11, 12,
24 Characteristic2 Setting group 2 active GI 1 215
20
25 Characteristic3 Setting group 3 active Not supported
26 Characteristic4 Setting group 4 active Not supported
27 Auxiliary input1 User specified signal 1 (Signal specified by IECB1: ON) (*1) GI 1 1, 7, 9 215
Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision Not supported
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 215
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision GI 1 1, 7, 9 215
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 7, 9 215
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported
46 Group warning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 215
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 215
Earth Fault Indications

48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault (*2) Not supported
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault (*2) Not supported
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault (*2) Not supported
51 Earth Fault Fwd Earth fault forward (*2) Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse (*2) Not supported
 224 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Typ
e ID
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215
68 General trip BO status specified by IECGT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215
69 Trip L1 BO status specified by IECAT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215
70 Trip L2 BO status specified by IECBT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215
71 Trip L3 BO status specified by IECCT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported
Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km selectable by
73 Fault location X In ohms Not supported
IECFL)
74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported
75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
Teleprotection Signal
76 Carrier signal sending Not supported
transmitted
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip Not supported
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip (OC1 trip) Not supported
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip (OR logic of OC1 to OC3 trip) Not supported
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 and SEF1 trip) Not supported
Definite time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 to EF3 and
93 Trip IN>> Not supported
SEF1 to SEF3 trip)
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported
Note (*1): Not available if the setting is "0".

(∗2): Not available when neither the EF nor SEF element is used.
 225 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Typ
e ID
IECG1
IECI1 User specified 1 Signal specified by IECE1: ON (*1) 2 1, 7 215
(yes/no)
IECG2
(yes/no)
IECG3
(yes/no)
IECG4
(yes/no)
IECG5
(yes/no)
IECG6
(yes/no)
IECG7
(yes/no)
IECG8
(yes/no)
Measurands(*3)
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> Not supported
145 Measurand I,V Vb measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.2 2, 7 215
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Vb measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.3 2, 7 215
147 Measurand IN,VEN Ve measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.4 2, 7 215
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
148 Va, Vb, Vc measurand <meaurand II> -- 3 2, 7 215
P,Q,f
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries of
241 Not supported
a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry with confirm Not supported
250 Write entry with execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Note (∗3): depends upon the relay model as follows:
Type ID=3.1 Type ID=3.2 Type ID=3.3 Type ID=3.4

Model (INF=144) (INF=145) (INF=146) (INF=147)
IL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q IN VEN
Model 410 0 0 Vab 0 Vab 0 0 0 Ve
Type ID=9
Model (INF=148)
IL1 IL2 IL3 VL1 VL2 VL3 3-phase P 3-phase Q f
Model 410 0 0 0 Va Vb Vc 0 0 f
Above values are normalized by IECNF∗.
 226 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Typ
INF Description Contents COM COT FUN
e ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0 -- 7 9 215
interrogation
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 215
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported
17 Teleprotection on/off Not supported
18 Protection on/off (*4) ON/OFF 20 20 215
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 215
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 215
24 Activate characteristic 2 Setting Group 2 ON 20 20 215
25 Activate characteristic 3 Setting Group 3 Not supported
26 Activate characteristic 4 Setting Group 4 Not supported
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry Not supported
Read values or attributes of a

244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of generic
245 Not supported
data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry with execution Not supported
251 Write entry abort Not supported
Note (∗4): When the relay is receiving the "Protection off" command, the " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
GRE130
Description Contents Comment
supported
Basic application functions
Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data No
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
Measurand
value times
Current L1 Ia No
Current L2 Ib No
Current L3 Ic No
Voltage L1-E Va 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting
Voltage L2-E Vb 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting
Voltage L3-E Vc 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting
Active power P P No
Reactive power Q Q No
Frequency f f 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFf setting
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting
 227 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
 228 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix P
IEC61850: Interoperability
 229 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
1. IEC61850 Documentation
IEC61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) for GRE130
The GRE130 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the
following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes GRE130

L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD Yes
Common Logical Node Yes
LLN0 Yes
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions
PDIF ---
PDIR ---
PDIS ---
PDOP ---
PDUP ---
PFRC Yes
PHAR ---
PHIZ ---
PIOC ---
PMRI ---
PMSS ---
POPE ---
PPAM ---
PSCH ---
PSDE ---
PTEF ---
PTOC ---
PTOF Yes
PTOV Yes
PTRC Yes
PTTR ---
PTUC ---
PTUV Yes
PUPF ---
PTUF Yes
PVOC ---
PVPH ---
PZSU ---
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions
RDRE ---
RADR ---
RBDR ---
RDRS ---
RBRF ---
RDIR ---
RFLO ---
RPSB ---
RREC ---
RSYN ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control
 230 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CALH ---
CCGR ---
CILO Yes
CPOW ---
CSWI Yes
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references
GAPC ---
GGIO Yes
GGIO (for GOOSE) Yes
GSAL ---
I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
IARC ---
IHMI ---
ITCI ---
ITMI ---
A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
ANCR ---
ARCO ---
ATCC ---
AVCO ---
M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
MDIF ---
MHAI ---
MHAN ---
MMTR ---
MMXN ---
MMXU Yes
MSQI Yes
MSTA ---
S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
SARC ---
SIMG ---
SIML ---
SPDC ---
X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
XCBR Yes
XSWI ---
T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
TCTR ---
TVTR ---
Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
YEFN ---
YLTC ---
YPSH ---
YPTR ---
Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system
equipment
ZAXN ---
ZBAT ---
ZCAB ---
ZCAP ---
ZCON ---
 231 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ZGEN ---
ZGIL ---
ZLIN ---
ZMOT ---
ZREA ---
ZRRC ---
ZSAR ---
ZTCF ---
ZTCR ---
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRE130
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACD Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV Yes
SAV ---
WYE Yes
DEL Yes
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC Yes
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---
 232 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M Y
Class
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
 233 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PFRC class
Data
Class
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value df/dt O Y
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOF class
Data
Class
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOV class
Data
Class
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
 234 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PTRC class
Data
Class
Status Information
Tr ACT Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection C N
functions)
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
PTUV class
Data
Class
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
PTUF class
Data
Class
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y
 235 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
CILO class
Data
Class
Status Information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y
EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y
CSWI class
Data
Class
Controls
Pos DPC Switch, general M Y
PosA DPC Switch L1 O N
PosB DPC Switch L2 O N
PosC DPC Switch L3 O N
OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N
OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N
GGIO class
Data
Class
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:::
 236 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
GGIO (for GOOSE) class

Data
Class
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
MMXU class
Data
Class
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O Y
PhV WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
A WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O N
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
 237 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
MSQI class
Data
Class
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C N
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
XCBR class
Data
Class
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N
 238 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRE130
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
 239 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |M Y
backward | both
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |GC_2 (1) Y
backward
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |GC_2 (2) Y
backward
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |GC_2 (3) Y
backward
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) Y
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |GC_2 (4) Y
backward
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
 240 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
MV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high |O N
low-low |…
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
 241 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
CMV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal Vector MX O N
cVal Vector MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high |O N
low-low |…
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | VabO N
| Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
Services
 242 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
DEL class
Name
Data
phsAB CMV GC_1 Y
phsBC CMV GC_1 Y
phsCA CMV GC_1 Y
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | VabO N
| Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
Services
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B|C|… O N
Services
 243 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E N
_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E
_M and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
Substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.2 (see IEC 61850-8-1)
 244 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
DPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ Y
M
_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ Y
M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E
_M and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on |M Y
bad-state
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on |PICS_SUBST N
bad-state
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O Y
Services
 245 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M
_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_ N
M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E
_M and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
 246 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
ING class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
ASG class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
 247 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 AC_LN0_EX Y
only;
for example "IEC
61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services
Logical nodes for GRE130

Logical Nodes Relay Element
PFRC
PFRC1 FRQ (Setting)
PFRC2 FRQ (Setting)
PFRC3 FRQ (Setting)
PFRC4 FRQ (Setting)
PTOF
PTOF1 FRQ (Setting)
PTOF2 FRQ (Setting)
PTOF3 FRQ (Setting)
PTOF4 FRQ (Setting)
PTOV
PTOV11 OV1
PTOV12 OV2
PTOV13 OV3
PTOV21 ZPS1
PTOV22 ZPS2
PTOV31 NPS1
PTOV32 NPS2
PTRC
PTRC1 General Trip
PTUV
PTUV11 UV1
PTUV12 UV2
PTUV13 UV3
PTUF
PTUF1 FRQ (Setting)
PTUF2 FRQ (Setting)
PTUF3 FRQ (Setting)
PTUF4 FRQ (Setting)
 248 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement for GRE series IED
・NTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the IEC
61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series.
Together with the MICS, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC
61850-10.
・CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance
statement”.
 249 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Client/ Server/ IED Remarks

subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N
B24 SCSM: other -
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
If Server side (B11) supported

M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
M8 Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y
M8-5 data-reference Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O O Y
M12-1 entryID
M12-2 DataRefInc
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O N
Server
S1 GetServerDirectory M Y
 250 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O N
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S27-3 data-update (dupd) N
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
 251 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O N
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M N
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O N
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 100ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 100ms
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 100ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has
been declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
 252 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PICS for A-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC 61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
 253 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Protcol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing (PIXIT) for IEC61850 interface in GRE series IED
・Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the
IEC 61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series version
upper than A (MVM850-01-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to
IEC 61850-10.
・Contents of this document
Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
PIXIT for Association model
ID Description Value / Clarification

As1 Maximum number of clients that can 6
set-up an association simultaneously
As2 TCP_KEEPALIVE value 7200 seconds at the default setting.
Setting range is from 1s to 43200s.
As3 Lost connection detection time After the KEEPALIVE is no response,
retrying 9 times every “X” seconds until
declaring that the association has been lost.
“X” is one tenth of TCP_KEEPALIVE value.
Ex. The lost connection detection time is 18s
(9 times x 2 s), when TCP_KEEPALIVE
value is 20 s.
As4 Is authentication supported N
As5 What association parameters are Transport selector N
necessary for successful association Session selector N
Presentation selector N
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
As6 If association parameters are N.A.
necessary for association, describe the
correct values e.g.
As7 What is the maximum and minimum Max MMS PDU size 8172
MMS PDU size Min MMS PDU size Not limited. It
depends on a request.
As8 What is the maximum startup time 180 seconds
after a power supply interrupt Check the start-up signal
(No.227)
 254 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PIXIT for Server model

Sr1 Which analogue value (MX) quality bits Validity:
are supported (can be set by server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N Overflow
Y OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate (Only Hz)
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr2 Which status value (ST) quality bits are Validity:
supported (can be set by server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr3 What is the maximum number of data Not restricted; depend on the max. MAX
values in one GetDataValues request PDU size given in previous page.
Sr4 What is the maximum number of data N.A.
values in one SetDataValues request
Sr5 Which Mode / Behavior values are On Y
supported Blocked N
Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
 255 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PIXIT for Data set model

Ds1 What is the maximum number of data Not limited by an internal configuration
elements in one data set (compare ICD parameter.
setting)
This IED does not have CreateDataSet
service. But any DataSet can be defined by
using engineering tool. The maximum number
depends on the memory size of IED.
Ds2 How many persistent data sets can be Not limited by an internal configuration
created by one or more clients parameter.
(this number includes predefined
datasets) The maximum number depends on the
memory size of IED.
Ds3 How many non-persistent data sets N.A.
can be created by one or more clients
PIXIT for Substitution model

Sb1 Are substituted values stored in N.A.
volatile memory?
PIXIT for Setting group control model

Sg1 What is the number of supported 2
setting groups for each logical device
(compare NumSG in the SGCB)
Sg2 What is the effect of when and how the Just SelectActiveSG service will be
non-volatile storage is updated supported according to PICS.
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4) After changing setting group number with
LCD panel, you can see new setting group
with GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 Can multiple clients edit the same N.A.
setting group
Sg4 What happens if the association is lost N.A.
while editing a setting group
Sg5 Is EditSG value 0 allowed? N.A.
 256 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PIXIT for Reporting model

Rp1 The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
quality change Y
data update N
general interrogation Y
Rp2 The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y
data-set-name Y
data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Rp3 Can the server send segmented Y
reports
Rp4 Mechanism on second internal data Send report immediately
change notification of the same analogue
data value within buffer period
(Compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Rp5 Multi client URCB approach Each URCB is visible to all clients
(compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.1)
Rp6 What is the format of EntryID It is made up of the circular buffer counter
at the time the event was entered.
Rp7 What is the buffer size for each BRCB For example, LLN0$ST$Health can be
or how many reports can be buffered stored 40 events.
Rp8 Pre-configured RCB attributes that N.A.
cannot be changed online when RptEna
= FALSE
(see also the ICD report settings)
Rp9 May the reported data set contain:
- structured data objects? Y
- data attributes? Y
Rp10 What is the scan cycle for binary GRE110: More than 1500 milliseconds
events? Fixed
Is this fixed, configurable
Rp11 Does the device support to pre-assign a N
RCB to a specific client in the SCL
 257 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PIXIT for Logging model

Lg1 What is the default value of LogEna N.A.
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.2.1,
the default value should be FALSE)
Lg2 What is the format of EntryID N.A.
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.1)
Lg3 If there are multiple Log Control N.A.
Blocks that specify the Journaling of the
same MMS NamedVariable and TrgOps
and the Event Condition
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.2)
Lg4 Pre-configured LCB attributes that N.A.
cannot be changed online
PIXIT for Generic substation events model

Go1 What elements of a subscribed N source MAC address
GOOSE header are checked to decide Y destination MAC address
the message is valid and the allData = as configured
values are accepted? If yes, describe Y Ethertype = 0x88B8
the conditions. Y APPID = as configured and 0
Note: the VLAN tag may be Y gocbRef = as configured
removed by a ethernet switch and N timeAllowedtoLive
should not be checked N datSet
Y goID = as configured
N t
N stNum
Y sqNum
Y test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
Go2 Can the test flag in the published N
GOOSE be turned on / off
Go3 What is the behavior when the If the configuration is incorrect, the GOOSE
GOOSE publish configuration is isn’t published.
incorrect
Go4 When is a subscribed GOOSE Message does not arrive prior to TAL.
marked as lost?
(TAL = time allowed to live value
from the last received GOOSE
message)
Go5 What is the behavior when one or [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
more subscribed GOOSE messages No fail will be detected.
isn’t received or syntactically
incorrect (missing GOOSE) [sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
(=1100 0000 1000 0). After receiving message with
correct sqNum order, the quality information is
set to GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
Go6 What is the behavior when a Refer to Go5.
subscribed GOOSE message is
 258 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

out-of-order
Go7 What is the behavior when a GOOSE subscribe quality information will
subscribed GOOSE message is become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
duplicated (=1100 0000 1000 0).
Go8 Does the device subscribe to Y, with the VLAN tag
GOOSE messages with/without the Y, without the VLAN tag
VLAN tag?
Go9 May the GOOSE data set contain: Subscribed Published
- structured data objects (FCD)? Y N
- timestamp data attributes? N N
Note: data attributes (FCDA) is
mandatory
Go10 Published FCD supported common -
data classes / data types are
Go11 Subscribed FCD supported -
common data classes / data types are
Go12 What is the slow retransmission 60 seconds with TAL = 120 seconds
time? Fixed.
Is it fixed or configurable?
Go13 What is the minimum supported <minTime>
retransmission time? 300 milliseconds
What is the maximum supported <maxTime>
retransmission time? -
Is it fixed or configurable? Fixed
Go14 Can the Goose publish be turned Y
on / off by using
SetGoCBValues(GoEna)
Go15 What is the fast retransmission 300 milliseconds with TAL = 600 milliseconds
scheme? Fixed.
Is it fixed or configurable?
Go16 What is the behavior when one When expected time (TAL) spends without
subscribed GOOSE message exceeds GOOSE message, GOOSE subscribe quality
the previous time Allowed to Live information will become QUESTIONABLE
(TAL) (=1100 0000 0000 0).
After that, when IED receive time exceeded

GOOSE with SqNum=0, GOOSE subscribe
quality information will become GOOD (=0000
0000 0000 0).
When IED receive time exceeded GOOSE with

SqNum!=0, GOOSE subscribe quality information
will become QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0)
When GOOSE with TAL=0 is received, GOOSE

subscribe quality information will become
QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100
0000 1000 0)
Payload data consistency is not used to

determine if TAL is exceeded.
subscribed GOOSE message is “test” become QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100 0000
 259 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

0001 0).
Payload data is not received.
subscribed GOOSE message is become QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
“ndsCom” (=1100 0000 0100 0).
Payload data is not received.
Go19 Acceptable data type Boolean
BitSring
Integer
Unsigned Integer
But each data size shall be less than 32 bits.
Other types (TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will

be ignored by IED.
When GOOSE subscribe quality information is
GOOD, the IED receives the payload data.
Go20 Dataset structure of a subscribed This is not checked. Two GOOSEs, which have
GOOSE same header (e.g.GoID) and different dataset
structure, are treated as the same GOOSEs.
And if received GOOSEs have same header, the

fixed position of the GOOSE dataset is read. E.g.
the 1st element of the dataset is set to read, it
keeps reading the 1st element even if the dataset
structure is different.
Note:
Subscribed payload data structure is checked to
determine if IED accepts/discards the data;
however the TAL timeout is reset even when such
data is discarded.
Go21 What is the behavior when the The device starts sending GOOSE from
device starts up? stNum=1 and sqNum=1.
Go22 Is it supported to set the “ndsCom” N
as TRUE?
TAL = Time Allowed to Live
 260 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PIXIT for Control model

Ct1 What control models are supported Y status-only
(compare PICS) Y direct-with-normal-security
Y sbo-with-normal-security
N direct-with-enhanced-security
N sbo-with-enhanced-security
Ct2 Is the control model fixed, Configurable
configurable and/or online changeable? (need to restart after configuration)
Ct3 Is Time activated operate supported N
Ct4 Is “operate-many” supported N
Ct5 Will the DUT activate the control N
output when the test attribute is set in Test flag FALSE TRUE
the SelectWithValue and/or Operate IED
request (when N test procedure Ctl2 is Mode
applicable) Normal Accepted Rejected
Test Rejected Accepted
Accepted:
The control request is accepted by IED.
Rejected:
The control request is rejected by IED with
AddCause “Blocked-by-Mode”.
Ct6 What are the conditions for the time N.A.
(T) attribute in the SelectWithValue
and/or Operate request?
Ct7 Is pulse configuration supported N
Ct8 What is the behavior of the DUT when Only interlock bit is checked.
the check conditions are set? This behavior is fixed.
Is this behavior fixed, configurable,
online changeable? Note:
When interlock is an enable, the control
request is rejected by IED with AddCause
“Blocked-by-Interlocking”.
Ct9 What additional cause diagnosis are Y Not-supported
supported? N Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
N Invalid-position
N Position-reached
N Parameter-change-in-execution
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
N Blocked-by-synchrocheck
N Command-already-in-execution
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
N Abortion-by-cancel
N Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-non-selected
Ct10 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond Set orCat with unsupported value.
with SelectWithValue request?
 261 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Ct11 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond N.A.
with Select request?
Ct12 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond DOns, SBOns:
with Operate request? Set orCat with unsupported value.
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct13 Which origin categories are N
supported?
Ct14 What happens if the orCat is not DOns, SBOns:
supported? “test-not-ok” IED respond
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct15 Does the IED accept a DOns, SBOns: N
SelectWithValue/Operate with the same The control request is rejected by IED with
ctlVal as the current status value? AddCause “Blocked-by-Interlocking”.
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct16 Does the IED accept a select/operate DOns,: Y
on the same control object from 2 SBOns: N
different clients at the same time? DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct17 Does the IED accept a SBOns: N
Select/SelectWithValue from the same SBOes: N.A.
client when the control object is already
selected (tissue 334)
Ct18 Is for SBOes the internal validation N.A.
performed during the SelectWithValue
and/or Operate step?
Ct19 Can a control operation be blocked by Y
Mod=Off or Blocked
Ct20 Does the IED support local / remote Y
operation?
Ct21 Does the IED send an DOns: N
InformationReport with LastApplError SBOns: Y
as part of the Operate response- for
control with normal security?
 262 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
PIXIT for TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION model

Tm1 What quality bits are supported N LeapSecondsKnown
(may be set by the IED) N ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized
Tm2 Describe the behavior when the time The quality attribute “ClockNotSynchronized”
synchronization signal/messages are will be set to TRUE.
lost
Tm3 When is the time quality bit "Clock N.A.
failure" set?
Tm4 When is the time quality bit "Clock It depends on the condition of
not synchronised” set? synchronization. Typically 120 seconds
Tm5 Is the timestamp of a binary event N
adjusted to the configured scan cycle?
Tm6 Does the device support time zone Y
and daylight saving? Support time zone only.
Tm7 Which attibutes of the SNTP Y Leap indicator not equal to 3?
response packet are validated? N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is equal to
value sent by the SNTP client as
Transmit Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields are
checked for reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
PIXIT for FILE TRANSFER model

Ft1 What is structure of files and N.A.
directories?
Where are the COMTRADE files

stored?
Are comtrade files zipped and what

files are included in each zip file?
Ft2 Directory names are separated from N.A.
the file name by
Ft3 The maximum file name size including N.A.
path (recommended 64 chars)
Ft4 Are directory/file name case sensitive? N.A.
Ft5 Maximum file size N.A.
Ft6 Is the requested file path included in N.A.
the file name of the MMS fileDirectory
respond?
Ft7 Is the wild char supported MMS N.A.
fileDirectory request?
Ft8 Is it allowed that 2 client get a file at N.A.
the same time?
 263 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement (TICS) of the IEC61850 communication interface GRE series IED
・Introduction
According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a
conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series
version upper than A (MVM850-01-A).
・Mandatory Intop Tissues
During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:
• green Tissues with the category “IntOp” are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1
• Tissues with the category “Ed.2” Tissues should not be implemented.
Below table gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.
 264 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Part Tissue Description

Nr Implemented Y/n.a.
8-1 116 GetNameList with empty response? Y

165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues Y
183 GetNameList error handling Y
7-4 None
7-3 28 Definition of APC n.a.
54 Point def xVal, not cVal n.a.
55 Ineut = Ires ? n.a.
60 Services missing in tables Y
63 mag in CDC CMV Y
65 Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option Y
219 operTm in ACT n.a.
270 WYE and DEL rms values Y
7-2 30 control parameter T n.a
31 Typo n.a.
32 Typo in syntax n.a.
35 Typo Syntax Control time n.a.
36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing n.a.
37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type n.a.
39 Add DstAddr to GoCB Y
40 GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID” Y
41 GsCB “AppID” to “GsID” n.a.
42 SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp" n.a.
43 Control "T" semantic n.a.
44 AddCause - Object not sel n.a.
45 Missing AddCauses (neg range) Y
46 Synchro check cancel n.a.
47 "." in LD Name? Y
49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
50 LNName start with number? Y
51 ARRAY [0..num] missing n.a.
52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum Y
53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV n.a.
151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. Y
166 DataRef attribute in Log n.a.
185 Logging - Integrity periode n.a.
189 SV Format n.a.
190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of #453) Y
234 New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit integer) n.a.
275 Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453) Y
278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) Y
Part 6 1 Syntax Y
5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y
8 SIUnit enumeration for W n.a.
10 Base type for bitstring usage Y
17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y
169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 Y
NOTE: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other technical tissues in the table are
mandatory if applicable.
Optional IntOp Tissues
 265 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
After the approval of the server conformance test procedures version 2.2 the following IntOp
tissues were added or changed. It is optional to implement these tissues.
Part Tissue Nr Description Implemented

Y/N/n.a.
8-1 246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError Y
8-1 545 Skip file directories with no files n.a
7-2 333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB n.a.
7-2 453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues N
6 245 Attribute RptId in SCL N
6 529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown n.a.
Other Implemented Tissues
Part Tissue Nr Description Implemented

Y/N/n.a.
8-1 109 GOOSE, GSE, SV Addresses Y
118 File directory n.a.
121 GOOSE subscriber behavior Y
344 TimeOfEntry misspelled Y
7-4 76 CBOpCap and SwOpCap N
7-2 38 Syntax "AppID" or "GoID" Y
6 3 Missing ENUMs Y
6 ReportControl/OptFields N
7 Duplication of attributes N
11 Schema for IP Addr? N
15 bufOvfl in Schema? Y
 266 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
2. CB remote control
To control the CB at remote site with the IEC 61850 communication, do the following.
･Operation item
- Remote control by the Select Before Operate or Direct Operate (CB Open / CB Close)
- Change of interlock position (BlkOpn or BlkCls)
- Trip LED reset
・Operating procedure
To control the CB at remote site with ICE 61850 communication is require the following three steps.
- get Logical nodes by using IEC 61850 data setting tools (such as TAMARACK tool).
- change the control logical node (XCBR, CILO or CSWI).
When CB is remote controlled from PC, showing below the control reaction depending on the CB Status.
CB Status Response
BI-a BI-b CB LED

CB Open Operation CB Close Operation
(CB_OPC_BI) (CB_CLC_BI) lighting
・Unlock: operate ・Unlock: not operate
0 0 CLOSE
・Lock※: not operate ・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: operate ・Unlock: not operate
1 0 CLOSE
・Lock: not operate ・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: not operate ・Unlock: not operate
1 1 CLOSE
・Unlock: not operate ・Unlock: operate
0 1 OPEN
※Lock condition is as follows.

• Setting the Inter lock in the Control screen of front panel LCD (see chapter 4.2.6.11) and remote
setting the CB open lock and CB close lock from PC.
• Occurring Relay Trip.
• When Local/Remote status is “Local” (see chapter 4.2.7.1).
• When Control status is “Disable” (see chapter 4.2.6.11).
 267 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Appendix O
Ordering
 268 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Ordering
Under/Overvoltage Relay GRE130 A 0
Type:
Voltage Relay GRE130
Model:
- Model 410: Four pole
2 x BIs, 4 x Bos, 1 x Relay fail 410
6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail 411
6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail 412
Rating:
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac 1
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc 2
VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc A
Standard and language:
IEC (English) 0
ANSI (English) 1
Chinese 2
Communication:
RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 10
RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 11
Following options can be equipped
with Model 402 and 422 only 20
RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 21
RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0) A0
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) A1
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) B0
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) B1
100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) C0
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) C1
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) D0
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) D1
100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0)
+RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)
 269 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents

No.
0.0 Nov. 24, 2010 -- First issue
1.0 Apr. 19, 2012 4.2.6 Modified the description.
Appendix G Modified the description.
Appendix J Modified the description.
Appendix L Modified the description.
1.1 Jan. 28, 2013 Appendix F Modified the diagrams.
Appendix J Modified the description.
Appendix M Modified the Ordering Cords.
1.2 Feb. 26, 2013 Appendix J Modified the description.
2.0 May.29, 2014 Add model 412A and IEC60850-5-103 and IEC61850 communication
1 Add the 412A model and communication.
3.2.2 Modified the description.
3.2.4 Add the description.
3.3.3 Modified the description
4.1 Add the description of GRE130-412A.
4.2 Add the communication settings.
4.5 Add the IEC60870-5-103.
4.6 Add the IEC61850
5 Add the GRE130-412A descriptions.
Appendix A Modified the Signal List
Appendix B Modified the description
Appendix C Add the GRE130-412A.
Appendix E Add the GRE130-412A
Appendix F Add the GRE130-412A
Appendix G Modified the description
Appendix J Modified the description
Appendix L Modified the description
Appendix M Add the description.
Appendix N Add the description
Appendix O Modified the section No.
 270 

Gre130 6F2T0176 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Gre130 6F2T0176 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2014

Explanation of symbols used

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 50

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 128

The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.

The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.

The GRE130 series provides the following functions.

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable

Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves

Overvoltage Inverse Time

Operating Time (secs)

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic

The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

3(∗) 65 & & t 0 103

Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

3(∗) 68 & & t 0 110

Figure 2.1.4 OV2 Overvoltage Protection

3(∗) 71 & & t 0 117

Figure 2.1.5 OV3 Overvoltage Protection

(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

Definite time reset

Undervoltage Inverse Time

Operating Time (secs)

Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic

Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.10 UV2 Undervoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.11 UV3 Undervoltage Protection

(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZPS

Definite time reset

Figure 2.1.16 ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.17 ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

Operating Time (secs)

Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NPS

Definite time reset

Figure 2.1.19 NPS1 Overvoltage Protection

Figure 2.1.20 NPS2 Overvoltage Protection

2.2 Frequency Protection

2.2.1 Frequency element

Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element

Figure 2.2.2 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

211 231 235

Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic

[FT1] F11 / F12 characteristic Protection selected

[DFT1] setting Protection selected

Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic

F1 & ≥1 E E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2

F1 & ≥1 E E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)